/
Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS,” “USING
THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 4, 5), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 6, 7). These sections provide important
information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have
gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in its
entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
by the manufacturer.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
202
Copyright © 2005 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
001
008e
•
Before using this unit, make sure to read the instruc-
tions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
•
Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also, the
supplied power cord must not be used with any
other device.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
001-50
•
009
•
Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket
outlet with a protective earthing connection.
Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor
place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the
cord, producing severed elements and short circuits.
Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards!
..........................................................................................................
002a
•
Do not open or perform any internal modifications
on the unit.
..........................................................................................................
010
•
This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could cause
permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of
time at a high volume level, or at a level that is uncom-
fortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the
ears, you should immediately stop using the unit, and
consult an audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
003
•
Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides specific
instructions directing you to do so). Refer all
servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center,
or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Infor-
mation” page.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
011
•
004
Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the
unit.
•
Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are
..........................................................................................................
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or
are
012a
•
Immediately turn the power off, remove the power
cord from the outlet, and request servicing by your
retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information”
page when:
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
007
•
Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the
unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has
become wet); or
..........................................................................................................
008a
•
The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating instruc-
tions, or as marked on the bottom of unit.
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a
marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
013
•
..........................................................................................................
In households with small children, an adult should
provide supervision until the child is capable of
following all the rules essential for the safe operation
of the unit.
..........................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
014
107b
•
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
•
Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
015
•
108a
•
Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using extension
cords—the total power used by all devices you have
connected to the extension cord’s outlet must never exceed
the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord.
Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external
devices.
..........................................................................................................
109a
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 21).
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
110a
•
016
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in
your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the
outlet.
Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center,
or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
•
111: SIeflecutiosned improperly, batteries may explode or leak
..........................................................................................................
019
•
and cause damage or injury. In the interest of safety,
please read and observe the following precautions.
Batteries must never be recharged, heated,
taken apart, or thrown into fire or water.
1
2
• Carefully follow the installation instructions for
batteries, and make sure you observe the correct
polarity.
..........................................................................................................
023
•
DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
• Avoid using new batteries together with used
ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types of
batteries.
Damage to speakers or other system components may result.
3
5
..........................................................................................................
• Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time.
026
•
Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower
vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of insecti-
cides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc.,
near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the
unit using a dry, soft cloth.
• If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth or paper
towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge from the
battery compartment. Then install new batteries. To avoid
inflammation of the skin, make sure that none of the
battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin. Exercise
the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near
your eyes. Immediately rinse the affected area with
running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes.
101a
•
The unit should be located so that its location or
position does not interfere with its proper venti-
lation.
6
ballpoint pens, necklaces, hairpins, etc.
..........................................................................................................
102b
..........................................................................................................
•
Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
112
•
Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance
with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that
may be observed in the region in which you live.
..........................................................................................................
103a
..........................................................................................................
•
At regular intervals, you should unplug the power
116
plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust
and other accumulations away from its prongs. Also,
disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever
the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time.
Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the
power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire.
•
Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do
not get your fingers pinched (p. 20). Adult super-
vision is recommended whenever small children use
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
118b
•
Always keep the following parts including with the
KR and small components that may be removed out
of the reach of small children to avoid accidental
ingestion of these parts.
..........................................................................................................
104
•
Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
Included Parts
105a
• Piano leg washers
•
If the unit could become a hazard if it moves, all
caster wheels should be locked or fixed in place once
the unit has been placed at the place of installation,
or has been loaded onto a vehicle.
• Bolts, washers, and springs used in attaching the pedals
• Cord clamps used for securing pedal cords, other cord
clamps (using double-sided tape), and cord clamp
attachment screws
..........................................................................................................
106
• Pedal stay securing screws
•
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the
unit.
Removable parts
• USB memory anti-theft lock (iron plate),
Anti-theft lock securing screw
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 3 and 4,
please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
Maintenance
401b
•
301 Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used
•
Since your piano has a polished finish that is as delicate as that
found on finely crafted wooden furniture, it needs careful,
periodic care. A few important suggestions concerning the proper
care of the unit follow.
by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter (such as
a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air condi-
tioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which
the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this
unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply
noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet.
• For dusting, using a soft, clean cloth and/or piano-use feather
duster. Be sure to wipe gently. Even the tiniest grains of sand
or grit can leave scratches on the surface if too much force is
applied while wiping.
307 Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to
all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to
speakers or other devices.
Do not use any cleaners or detergents, since they might deteri-
orate the surface of the cabinet, and produce cracks.
• If the cabinet’s surface loses its luster, wipe it thoroughly with
a soft cloth dampened with a little of the polishing liquid.
Do not use any cleaners or detergents, since they might deteri-
orate the surface of the cabinet, and produce cracks. Do not use
dusting cloths that contain chemicals.
•
•
308 Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER
switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been
completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to
turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch,
then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this
reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power
cord’s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily
accessible.
•
402 Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to
avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
•
403 The pedals of this unit are made of brass.
Brass eventually darkens as the result of the natural oxidization
process. If the brass becomes tarnished, polish it using commer-
cially available metal polisher.
306b
•
Batteries are supplied with the unit. The life of these batteries may
be limited, however, since their primary purpose was to enable
testing.
Repairs and Data
452 Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s memory may
Placement
•
•
351 Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should
always be backed up on an external memory, or written down on
paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid
the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry
related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move
it farther away from the source of interference.
352a
•
This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do
not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
352b
•
Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such
as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise
could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while
conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance
from this unit, or switch them off.
Additional Precautions
•
551 Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably
lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the
unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data,
we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of
important data you have stored in the unit’s memory on an
external memory.
354b
•
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that
radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise
subject it to temperature extremes. Also, do not allow lighting
devices that normally are used while their light source is very
close to the unit (such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to
shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
•
552 Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data
that was stored on an external memory once it has been lost.
Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of
data.
355b
•
553 Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons,
•
When moved from one location to another where the temperature
and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation)
may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if
you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before
using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until
the condensation has completely evaporated.
sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors.
Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
•
554 Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
•
556 When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing
shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
•
356 Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain on the
unit for long periods of time. Such objects can discolor or
otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
358 Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can be
•
557 A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal
operation.
•
the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.
•
359 Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument. Peeling
such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior finish.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
558a
•
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume
•
655 Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be
locked (have their write protect tab slid to the “Protect” position)
before you insert them into the drive on some other unit (except
the PR-300, or a product in the HP-G, HPi, MT, KR, or Atelier
families), or into a computer’s drive. Otherwise (if the write
protect tab remains in the “Write” position), when you perform
any disk operations using the other device’s disk drive (such as
checking the contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk
rendering the disk unreadable by this unit’s disk drive.
at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you
do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially
when it is late at night).
559b
•
When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-absorbent
material. Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to
become scratched or damaged, and could lead to malfunction.
•
560 Do not apply undue force to the music rest while it is in use.
•
561 Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold separately).
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
562 Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some
other make of connection cable, please note the following precau-
tions.
Before Using External
Memory
•
Using External Memory
•
705 Never touch the terminals of the External memory. Also, avoid
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables
that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use
of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low,
or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications,
contact the manufacturer of the cable.
getting the terminals dirty.
•
708 External memories are constructed using precision components;
handle the cards carefully, paying particular note to the
following.
•
565 Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure
• To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity, be sure
to discharge any static electricity from your own body before
handling the external memories.
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the
contact portion of the external memories.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
vibration.
• Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles, or
other such locations (storage temperature: 0 to 50˚ C).
• Do not allow cards to become wet.
that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the
instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the
keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of
this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting
trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must
immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord
from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from
whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest
Roland Service Center.
• Do not disassemble or modify the external memories.
Handling Floppy Disks
•
704 W(revhiseen) connecting external memory, make sure to press it until it
(Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive)
is fully inserted.
•
651 Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
•
•
Insert the external memory in the External Memory port evenly
and without undue force. Forcing the external memory may
damage the External Memory port.
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to
enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface
area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following
when handling floppy disks:
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended
temperature range: 10 to 50˚C (50 to 122˚F).
Do not insert any object other than the external memory (e.g.,
wires, coins, other types of disks, etc.) in the External Memory
port. This may damage the External Memory port.
•
•
Do not subject the External Memory port cover or connected
External memory to excessive stress.
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as
those generated by loudspeakers.
Close the external memory cover when using the External
memory for extended periods
•
652 Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect the
disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be
kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position
Handling CD-ROMs
only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.
•
801 Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded
fig.DiskProtect.e
surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be
read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially
available CD cleaner.
Rear side of the disk
203
*
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
GS (
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation.
) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Add
*
XG lite (
Protect
Write Protect Tab
209 Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
(prevents writing to disk)
*
204 Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
•
653 The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk.
*
Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may
be difficult to remove the disk.
Corporation.
•
654 Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to
protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty
or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as
causing the disk drive to malfunction.
*
This device in part makes use of Independent JPEG Group
software.
*
220 All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR Intelligent Piano.
While the KR Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano performances, it also
features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other useful functions. In order to enjoy
reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read through
this manual in its entirety.
Main Features
❍ Roland Digital Grand Brings Refinement to Interior Style
The KR’s grand piano cabinet exhibits elegance in form with a beautiful black, mirror-like surface. With
features just like those found on an acoustic grand, such as a top that opens and closes and folding
retractable keyboard lid (KR117M), this instrument is a perfect match for lounge or living room.
The KR117M lid also features hands-free closure for enhanced safety.
❍ Lusciously Resounding, Richly Expressive Piano Sound
The KR reproduces the rich tones of a high-quality grand piano, from the sounds of the hammers as they
strike the strings to the sounds made as the keys are released. 128-voice polyphony ensures full
responsiveness, even with heavy use of the pedals.
What’s more, The “Piano Designer” feature allows you to create your own favorite piano tones.
❍ True Grand Piano Feel
The KR features Roland’s Progressive Hammer Action keyboard, which reproduces the feel of a grand
piano, with a firm, weighty touch in the lower registers and a lighter response in the upper registers. This
keyboard also faithfully reproduces the distinctive “click” that’s produced when a grand piano’s keys are
played (Escapement function).
In addition to the ability of adjusting the key weight, a “Hammer Response” function, which reproduces
the subtle action of the hammers, is also incorporated, so there are two key-touch controls that come into
play when determining the precise character of the keyboard. Additionally, the instrument’s pedals are
firm and responsive, lending your performances fuller and more detailed expressiveness.
❍ Accomplish Tasks Easily with the Main Buttons
Almost all of the KR’s common functions, including playing back songs, displaying notations, running
the automatic accompaniment, selecting tones, and so on can be accomplished using the Main buttons to
the left of the screen.
❍ Full Complement of Player Piano Functions
You can also use the CD drive to play back a wide variety of music on the CD included with the
instrument as well as songs on CD-ROMs containing saved SMF files, player piano CDs, and audio CDs.
Moreover, you can add song data by copying songs saved on USB memory and CDs to the KR’s
“Favorites.”
The KR117M and KR115M includes a “Moving Keys” function that plays the keys along with the song,
providing exquisite performances that are played automatically.
Also included is a convenient remote control, which you can use for selecting songs, adjusting volume
balances, switching the Moving Keys function on and off, and even for switching the images that appear
in external displays--simply and easily. You can connect an external display or television set to the piano
for enlarged displays of the Song Select screen, lyrics screen, slide shows, and notations.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
❍ Easy-To-Use “Music Assistant” Automatic Accompaniment Feature
You can select from an amazing 500 settings to get automatic accompaniment that perfectly matches the
song you are playing.
Each song’s Music Assistant settings are shown in a manner that is easy to grasp, so playing along with
the changes in the accompaniment is a snap.
For easy enjoyment of Music Assistant, the KR also includes songs that you can perform while reading
the chord charts.
❍ Utilizes External Memory–the New Media
You can save song data created on the KR to External memory (sold separately). Extremely portable, high-
capacity external memory also connects easily to computers, allowing song data to be transferred easily.
Taking further advantage of the high-capacity memory, you can also play back audio files with the KR.
❍ Connect External Speakers to Produce Concert Hall Presence
You can connect an amp and speakers to the KR and play the sounds of the reverb and accompaniment
through the external speakers to produce the effect of being enveloped by an orchestra.
The KR is equipped with XLR connectors, a very convenient feature when the instrument is used on stage.
How To Use This Manual
The KR Owner’s Manual consists of three volumes, Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, and the USB Install
Guide.
Please start out by reading “Before You Start Playing” (p. 18) in the Owner’s Manual (this volume). This
explains how to connect the KR’s power cord and how to turn on the instrument’s power.
After turning on the KR’s power, please continue by reading Quick Start.
By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start, you can easily learn how to play the
KR and make use of its major functions (especially procedures that involve use of the “main buttons”).
The Owner’s Manual describes procedures, from basic operation to procedures for special applications
(for example, using the KR as an accompanist and creating songs), that will help you master the KR’s
many performance functions.
When connecting a computer to the USB port, be sure to read the USB Install Guide. This describes the
procedure for installing the driver needed to connect via USB.
*
For more on system requirements, refer to the “USB Installation Guide.” However, note that the KR is
not compatible with Mac OS 9.
■ Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets “[ ]”, as in One Touch Program [Piano]
button.
• For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual
screens and colors.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”
NOTE
• An asterisk (*) or a
at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution.
These should not be ignored.
• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY.......................................4
Conventions Used in This Manual......................9
(Surround) ..................................................................36
Selecting the Part for the Effect..........................40
3D ...........................................................................42
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects) .................46
Files ........................................................................53
Using the Metronome..........................................54
Using the Music Holders (KR115).....................20
Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen ................25
Main Screens ..............................................................25
Basic Screen...........................................................25
The [Option] Button and The [Exit] Button .....26
The Scroll Bar and The Page Icon......................26
Music Styles and Automatic
(One-Touch Arranger) ..............................................58
Chapter 1 Performance..................27
(One-Touch Piano) ....................................................27
(Tone Buttons)............................................................28
Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound
Effects ....................................................................29
Using Keywords to Search for Tones
(Tone Search)........................................................30
Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered
Together (Layer) ........................................................31
(Chord Finder)......................................................60
Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons) ........61
Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles
(Style Search) ........................................................62
Selecting Music Styles on External
Memories...............................................................63
Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns ..........64
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having the Accompaniment Start
Time (Tap Tempo) ...............................................94
(Track Buttons)...........................................................97
(Marker) ......................................................................98
Playback from a Marker Location .....................99
Moving a Marker ...............................................100
Played Back (Transpose).........................................102
Keyboard (Sync Start) .........................................65
Having a Count Sound Play at the End of
Modifying an Accompaniment ...............................68
(Fill In Buttons).....................................................68
Screen.....................................................................69
Music Styles (Style Orchestrator) ......................69
(Melody Intelligence)................................................70
Performance (Lower Tone) ......................................71
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part
(Redoing Recordings)..............................................110
the Accompaniment and the Keyboard
(Balance Knob) .....................................................73
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each
Performance Part (Part Balance)........................73
Formatting Media (Format)..............................114
Saving Songs.............................................................116
Copying Songs on External Memories to
Using Keywords to Search for Songs
Removing Songs From Favorites.......................83
How to Use the Remote Control........................84
About the Remote Control .................................85
Favorites....................................................................120
(Touch the Notes).................................................88
Scrolling the Notation Along with the
Performances (AutoSync DigiScore).................88
Making Detailed Settings for the Notation
Display...................................................................89
Saving Notations as Image Data........................92
Adjusting the Tempo ................................................94
Recording..................................................................122
Making the Connections ...................................122
Making Advanced A/V Sync Output
Settings ................................................................126
Playback (Aux Input)..............................................127
Making the Connections ...................................127
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Settings ................................................................128
Chapter 7 User Program
(Transpose)..........................................................148
(User Program) ........................................................130
Changing the Way User Programs Are
Loading Saved User Program Sets..................132
Deleting Saved User Program Sets .......................133
Memories to the User Memory..............................133
Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in
the User Memory to External Memories ........134
Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs...........134
Settings (Pedal Shift) .........................................134
Sequential Loading of User Program Sets
(PC Edit) ..............................................................150
(Beat Map).................................................................150
Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs.............151
a Song...................................................................151
Measure ...............................................................152
Creating Original Styles (User Styles) ..................153
Yourself (Style Converter) ................................155
Copying Styles on External Memories to
Sequencer) ................................................................136
The 16-Track Sequencer Screen .......................136
Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for
Recording a Performance .................................139
to External Memories ........................................160
(Rec Mode)................................................................140
Procedure ............................................................161
Recording
Layering a Recording Over Previously
(Key Touch).........................................................161
Repeated Recording at the Same Location
Chords (Chord Sequencer).....................................143
Inputting Chords without Playing
the Keyboard ......................................................144
Editing Songs ...........................................................145
Basic Operation of the Editing Functions.......145
Undoing Edits (Undo).......................................145
Copying Measures (Copy)................................146
Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure .....164
Changing the Settings for the Count ....................164
Other Settings...........................................................165
Procedure ............................................................165
Changing the Tuning (Tuning)........................166
Assigning Functions to Pedals and
Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Bend Range (Pedal Setting) .....169
Changing the Language (Language)...............170
and External Displays
Changing the Screen Message When the
Remembering the Settings Even When the
Restoring the Factory Settings
(Factory Reset)....................................................172
Control’s Buttons ...............................................172
Changing the Infrared Transmission
Function Settings................................................174
(External Display) ..............................................186
Using the V-LINK function ..............................187
Connecting MIDI Devices ......................................188
Connectors ..........................................................188
Making the Connections ...................................188
MIDI Settings............................................................189
(Tx Channel) .......................................................190
(Touch Screen)....................................................175
Changing the Part That Makes the Keys Move
(Only for Instrument Equipped with
Moving Key).............................................................175
Device (Composer MIDI Out)................................191
Changing the Aux Output Jacks Settings.......194
Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back ....177
Showing a Series of Images on an External
Changing Slide Shows ......................................178
Added (EffectsPart).................................................179
Automatically Starting the Quick Tour................180
Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance............181
Performance (Panel Lock) ......................................181
Changing the Tone Settings When Playing
Back Songs (Play Mode)....................................182
Effects List.................................................................209
Internal Song List.....................................................214
The KR allows you to use the following
(Information) ......................................................182
Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics).................................182
(Track Assign) ....................................................183
music files............................................................217
About the KR Sound Generator.......................217
Main Specifications..................................................219
Chapter 11 Connecting External
Devices..........................................185
Connecting an External Display or
Television..................................................................185
Connecting an External Display......................185
Index..............................................221
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
3
5
7
9
11
12
14
18 19 20
2
4
1
6
8 10
13
15
16 17
21
22
Power
*
1. [Power] switch
12.[User Function] button
Pressed to switch the power on and off (p. 21).
Performance Pads (p. 167).
*
keyboard.
13.[1]–[3] buttons
buttons numbered 11-12.
2. [Volume] knob
Adjusts the overall volume (p. 22).
14.Music Style buttons
3. [Sound Control] button
Add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and
distinctness (p. 43).
61).
Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that
you’ve made yourself or a Music Style on external
4. [Brilliance] knob
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (p. 22).
15.Fill In buttons
5. [Part Balance] button
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and
changes the accompaniment pattern (p. 68).
[To Variation] button
performance parts (p. 73).
6. [Balance] knob
[To Original] button
keyboard and for songs and accompaniments (p. 73).
16.[Intro/Ending] button
Play an intro or ending during automatic
accompaniment (p. 65).
7. [Transpose] button
Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being
played (p. 102).
Starts and stops automatic accompaniment (p. 65).
8. [Vocal Effects] Button
microphone (p. 47).
You can change the count settings (p. 67, p. 96).
These allow you to add and move markers in the
notation as well as repeat playback of song segments
simply and easily (p. 98).
9. [Surround/Reverb] button
Adds reverberation to the sound (p. 34).
Adds three-dimensional breadth to the sound (p. 36).
19.Beat indicator
10.[User Program] button
This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the
selected song or accompaniment.
130).
20.[Metronome] button
Activates the built-in metronome (p. 54).
Performance Pads
21.Tempo [-] [+] buttons
Adjusts the tempo.
11.[Style Orchestrator] button
This is used to change the arrangement type for
automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads
(p. 69).
Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to
the original tempo.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
40
23
24
27
28
31
32 38
2526
29
30
33 34 35 36 37
39
Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard
(p. 70).
22. Main Buttons
→ See the Quick Start
[Song/File] button
Use this button to select internal songs or songs from
external memories (p. 75).
[DigiScore] button
Displays notations (p. 87).
[Visual Lesson] button
You can use the practice function.
[Piano Designer] button (p. 181)
[Music Assistant] button
31.[Menu] button
You can select functions for playing back, recording or
editing a song (p. 111,p. 136, p. 153, p. 182).
32.Track buttons
Used to play back or record each track of a song (p. 97, p.
110).
[Super Tones] button
23.Touch Screen
33.[
(Reset)] button
This lets you perform a variety of operations just by
touching the screen (p. 25).
Resets the song playback-start location to the beginning
of the song.
24.Dial
34.[
(Play/Stop)] button
Use this to change on-screen values.
Starts and stops playback or recording a song.
25.[Exit] button
35.[ (Rec)] button
Returns you to the previous screen.
When pressed, this button places the instrument in
recording standby (p. 105, p. 136).
26.[Option] button
Displays a screen for advance function settings.
36.[
(Bwd)] button
(Fwd)] button
Rewinds the song.
27.Contrast knob
Adjusts the contrast of the screen (p. 25).
37.[
Fast-forwards the song.
28.[Tone] buttons
They are used to choose the kinds of tones (tone groups)
38.Infrared Receiver
played by the keyboard (p. 28).
remote control to operate the KR (p. 85).
[Piano] button
[Organ] button
[Guitar/Bass] button
[Strings] button
Here you can learn about instruments while having fun.
→ See the Quick Start
[Sax/Brass] button
[Voice] button
40.External Memory port
Connects an external memory to play (p. 75) and save songs (p.
29.One Touch Program button
[Piano] button
113).
*
Be sure to close the cover of the External Memory port after
connecting external memory to the External Memory port.
Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance (p. 27).
[Arranger] button
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic
accompaniment (p. 58).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Jack Panel (Left Side of Bottom Panel)
fig.panelRear
Jack Panel (Front)
1
2 3
4
5
6
7
Jack Panel (Rear)
11
8
9
10 12
13
14 15
1. Phones jacks
9. Pedal connector
A set of headphones can be connected here (p. 23).
Connect the pedal cord here (p. 21).
2. Mic Volume knob
10.Input jacks
You can connect other sound generating devices or
audio equipment here and have their sound be played
3. Mic jack
Used for connecting microphones (p. 23).
11.Aux Output jacks
4. Aux Input jacks
You can connect amps and external speakers here and
You can connect other sound generating devices or
audio equipment here and have their sound be played
through the KR’s speakers (p. 193).
play accompaniment or surround sound (p. 194).
12.Main Output jacks
This is also used for transmitting and receiving
performance data included in player piano data. (p. 127).
These jacks can be connected to your audio system to
Connect to external MIDI devices to exchange
performance data (p. 188).
13.Balanced Out (Fixed) jacks
This provides balanced audio signal output. Connect a
mixer or other such device here (p. 122).
6. USB connector
14.Video Out jack
You can connect a computer and exchange performance
data between the instrument and the computer (p. 178,
p. 195).
Connect a television here. This allows you to display the
the connected television set (p. 185).
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Ext Display
connector.
7. Expression Pedal jack
You can connect an expression pedal (optional EV-7) to use
15.Ext Display connector
this as an expression pedal.
Connect a external display here. You can display the
Song Select screen, slide show, lyrics, and notations on
the external display (p. 185).
8. AC inlet
Connect the included power cord to this inlet (p. 21).
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Video Out
jack.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Bottom Panel (Front Right)
Right Side of Bottom Panel
fig.panelUSB
CD Drive (Instrument with Moving
Key)
fig.panelbottom
17
21
21.Floppy disk drive connector
Connects an optional floppy disk drive to play and save
songs.
16
18
19
*
*
Use floppy disk drive available from Roland.
Attach the floppy disk drive to left of CD drive. For details of
the attachment, refer to the owner’s manual of the floppy disk
drive.
20
16.Access Indicator
This indicator will light when the inserted CD is being read.
17.Disc tray
Place the CD to be loaded on this tray.
18.Emergency eject hole
This hole allows the disc tray to be opened in case of an
emergency.
19.Eject button
Press this button to eject the CD.
*
You cannot eject the CD unless the power is on.
20.Serial connector
Connect a external equipment here.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
3. While holding up the top with one hand, lift up the top
Opening and Closing the Top
(KR117)
stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip.
fig.
D
Opening only the front top
C
Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their
own—adult supervision is required. Because the top is very heavy,
always use two or more people when opening and closing the top,
and be sure to handle it carefully.
1. Lift the right front (the upper note side: A in the figure)
of the board with both hands, fold it back, and then lay
it down slowly on the top.
fig.
A
Do not move the piano with the top in the open position. The top
stick may disengage from the socket, causing the top to fall.
When opening the top, be careful not to open it too far. Opening the
top at an angle in excess of 30 degrees may damage the unit, or cause
the top to drop. Also, before opening the top, make sure that no one
is in the path of the top as it is opened.
About the Topsticks and Topslip
The KR117 has two topsticks, each a different length.
Opening both the front top and the top
You can use the different topsticks to change the amount the
top is left open.
fig.
2. Follow Step 1 to open the front top. Then lift the right
front (the upper note side B: in the figure) of the board
Long top stick
Short top stick
with both hands.
fig.
The topsticks and topslip work together as illustrated below.
The long top stick: for inner top slip (C)
B
The short top stick: for outer top slip (D)
If you use the wrong top slip, the top stick could slip out of the top
slip, causing the top to fall. Make sure that the end of the top stick is
inserted securely into the top slip.
To close the top, reverse the opening procedure.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Opening and Closing the Top
(KR115)
Do not move the piano with the top in the open position. The top
stick may disengage from the socket, causing the top to fall.
Raising the Music Rest
To close the top, reverse the opening procedure.
1. Gently raise the music rest, then secure it in place.
Raising the Music Rest
KR117
fig.
2. To collapse the stand, fold in the metal fittings while
supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold
down the stand.
Always be sure to put the music rest in the upright position before
opening and raising the piano top. Be sure to leave the music rest in
the upright position before closing the piano top.
Open the Top board
Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their
own—adult supervision is required.
1. Open the front top.
2. Hold the music rest with both hands, then raise it
3. Lift the right front (the upper note side: A in the figure)
of the board with both hands, fold it up.
forward.
fig.
3. Place the music rest prop, at the rear of the music rest,
into a slot.
KR115
fig.
A
(1)
(2)
(2)
4. While holding up the top with one hand, lift up the top
1. Gently raise the music rest, then secure it in place as
stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip.
shown in the figure.
fig.
2. To collapse the stand, fold in the metal fittings while
supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold
down the stand.
When opening the top, be careful not to open it too far. Opening the
top at an angle in excess of 20 degrees may damage the unit, or cause
the top to drop. Also, before opening the top, make sure that no one
is in the path of the top as it is opened.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
■ Using the Music Holders
(KR115)
Opening and Closing the Lid
1. When opening the lid, use both hands to gently lift the
You can use the holders to hold pages in place.
lid and slide it inward.
When not using the holders, leave them folded down.
fig.mu_stand4
2. When closing the lid, be sure to use both hands to
grasp the lid, slowly pulling it down towards you, and
gently lower it until it stops (fully closed).
When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your fingers
get caught. Small children should use it only under the supervision
of an adult.
When moving the piano, for safety’s sake be sure to close the lid first.
Installing Batteries in the
Remote Control
Install the batteries provided in the remote control.
fig.Remote Control-1.j
NOTE
Make sure you don’t have anything (such as sheet music) on the
keyboard when you close the lid.
Remote Control’s (Rear)
KR117
fig.
Remote
Control’s
Cover
1. Open the battery cover on the back of the remote
control.
2. Insert the supplied AA batteries, as shown in the figure
of remote control.
NOTE
3. Close the battery cover.
Although the KR117’s cover is designed to close slowly when you let
go of it, it will close immediately if it has been opened only slightly.
Take care not to catch or pinch your fingers in the cover.
NOTE
Be careful to observe the correct polarity (+, - direction) when
installing the batteries.
KR115
fig.
For more information on the remote control button functions, refer
to “Using the Remote Control” (p. 84).
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Connecting the Power Cord
Connect the Pedal Cable
Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the
jack panel of the KR.
b
Screw
fig.00-01
c
e
Screw
Cord Cramp
KR117
A
B
C
Turning the Power On and Off
941
NOTE
Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By
turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
D
To turn the power on, turn the [Volume] knob all the
way down, and then press the [Power] switch.
The power will turn on.
After a few seconds, you will be able to play the
keyboard to produce sound.
KR115
A
Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the volume.
942
NOTE
B
C
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few
seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate
normally.
fig.00-06.e
D
KR117
1. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet jack.
2. Connect the pedal cord to the Pedal jack.
Power
3. Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord
KR115
e
Cramp
and screw b at A (see the picture above).
Power
4. Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord
e
c
Cramp
and screw
at B, C and D (see the picture
To turn the power off, turn the [Volume] knob all the
way to the left, and press the [Power] switch.
above).
5. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
The power will be turned off.
945
*
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the
POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Refer to “Power Supply” (p. 6).
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
About the Pedals
The pedals have the following functions, and are used
Adjusting the Sound’s
Volume and Brilliance
mainly for piano performance.
fig.00-08.e
Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume.
Turn the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the brightness of
the sound.
fig.00-07.e
Min
Max
Mellow
Bright
Soft Pedal
Damper Pedal
Sostenuto Pedal
You can use the remote control to change the volume.
Damper pedal (right pedal)
While this pedal is pressed, notes will be sustained even after
you take your fingers off the keys.
The length of the sustain changes subtly according to the
extent to which the pedal is depressed.
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal will
allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the
sounds that you played from the keyboard, adding a rich
resonance.
The KR simulates this damper resonance.
You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper
pedal. Please refer to “Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance” (p. 181).
Sostenuto pedal (center pedal)
This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were
already played when you pressed the pedal.
Soft pedal (left pedal)
When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard, the
sound will have a softer tone.
You can assign functions to the pedal. Refer to “Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions)” (p. 167).
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Connecting Headphones
Connecting a Microphone
The KR has two jacks for plugging in headphones. This
allows two people to listen through headphones
simultaneously, making it very useful for lessons and
performing piano pieces for four hands. Additionally, this
allows you to play without bothering others around you,
even at night.
You can connect a microphone into the Mic jack, and enjoy
karaoke with the KR.
fig.00-10
Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the
bottom left of the piano.
Connecting headphones will automatically mute the
sound from the internal speakers.
The headphone volume is adjusted by the [Volume]
knob of the KR.
fig.00-04.e
1. Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the Mic jack
on the lower-left area of the instrument.
2. Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob in front of the Mic jack
to adjust the volume level for the microphone.
3. Adjust the mic echo (p. 48).
Some Notes on Using a Microphone
• Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes late
at night or early in the morning.
• When connecting a microphone to the KR, be sure to
lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when
the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by
the speakers.
NOTE
Use Stereo headphones.
983
Some Notes on Using Headphones
• Howling could be produced depending on the location
• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
only by the headset or the plug.
• Connecting the headphones when the volume of
connected equipment is turned up may result in damage
to the headphones. Lower the volume on the KR before
plugging in the headphones.
-
-
Changing the orientation of the microphone.
Relocating microphone at a greater distance from
speakers.
-
Lowering volume levels.
• Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only
damage the headphones, but may also cause hearing
loss. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
2. Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the
Connecting an External
Display
like.
display to the Ext Display connector on the KR.
3. Turn on the KR.
For more about the external display settings, refer to
“Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the
External Display and the Television (External Display)” (p.
Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays (User
Image Display)” (p. 170)
For more on handling the external display, refer to your display’s
owner’s manual.
Turning the Power Off
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR.
2. Turn off the KR.
If your instrument came with a remote control, you can use the
remote control to switch screens. For more information, refer to
“Using the Remote Control” (p. 84).
3. Turn off the connected display.
Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument
In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan
monitors that are available on the market are compatible
with this instrument. However, before you connect any
monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:
• Resolution
640 x 480 pixels
31.5 kHz
• Horizontal scan frequency
• Vertical scan frequency
• Connector
60 Hz
3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type
Analog
• Signal
NOTE
Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the
frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not compatible
with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output
when images move, and in certain cases may even damage the
display.
■ Making the Connections
921
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices,
always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices
before making any connections.
D-sub 15 pin
(Mini)
D-sub 15 pin
(Mini)
Display Cable
(Sold separately)
KR’s Jack Panel
Ext Display Connector
External Display
1. Turn off the power to the KR and the display to be
connected.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
About the Touch Screen
Main Screens
The KR makes use of a touch screen.
This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by
touching the screen lightly.
■ Piano Screen
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen
like the one below is displayed. For details, refer to p. 27.
NOTE
The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger.
to operate the touch screen.
NOTE
The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to
changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this
happens, follow the steps in “Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch
Screen)” (p. 175) to correct the pointer position.
■ Basic Screen
NOTE
The following screen is called Basic screen.
Do not place items on the touch screen.
Song name or
Music Style name
Tempo
Beat Measure
■ Adjusting the Contrast of the
Screen
To adjust the contrast of the screen, turn the Contrast
The Tone names are
selected appear.
knob located at the right side of the screen.
These information are
displayed, when you use the
automatic accompaniment.
You can usually display this screen by pressing [Exit] button
several times.
Follow either of the procedures described below to display it.
• Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for
automatic accompaniment.
• Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, then press
one of the Tone buttons, then press the [Exit] button.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
■ Using the Main Icons
■ The Scroll Bar and The Page
You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do
things. The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional
work like buttons. These are called “Icons.”
Icon
The Song and Tone selection screens feature a scroll bar at
the right of the screen list, with page icons at the top and
bottom of the scroll bar.
The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows.
Some screens consist on two or more pages.
You can display the next page or the
previous page of the screen by touching
these icons.
Page icon
Scroll bar
When you select an internal song or music
files that includes the lyrics data, this icon
appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
Page icon
Touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through
the list.
NOTE
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
may not always match what appears in the manual.
985
■ The [Option] Button and The
[Exit] Button
The [Option] Button
This displays a screen for advance function settings.
The screen that opens differs depending on the screen that
was displayed when the button was pressed.
The [Exit] Button
Touch to cancel the settings currently being made and close
the screen displayed. Normally, pressing the [Exit] button
one or more times returns you to the Basic screen.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano
(One-Touch Piano)
You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single
button.
fig.panel1-1
1.
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
Since this instrument faithfully
action and response, keys
played in the top one-and-one-
half-octave range continue to
resonate, regardless of the
damper pedal action, and the
tone in this range is audibly
different. The Key Transpose
setting (p. 102) can also be
used to change the range that
is unaffected by the damper
pedal.
A “Piano screen” like the one shown below will appear.
fig.d-piano.eps_60
You can change the piano
performance settings by
touching the [Piano Designer]
button. For more details, refer
to “[Piano Designer] Button”
in the Quick Start.
following settings, regardless of the current panel settings.
• If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 32), the
keyboard returns to a single section.
• The pedals return to their usual functions (p. 22).
• The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected.
• The effect is automatically set to “Damper Resonance” (p. 46).
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
the lyrics data, <
>
appears in the Piano screen or
Basic screen. Touch this to
display the lyrics.
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 39).
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Performing with a Variety of Tones
(Tone Buttons)
The KR comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you
For more about the names of
Tones, take a look at the “Tone
List” (p. 202).
enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles.
The built-in sounds are called “Tones.” The sounds are organized into six tone
groups, which are assigned to the Tone buttons.
fig.panel1-2
1.
Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group.
You’ll see that button’s indicator light up.
The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you’ve selected.
fig.d-tonesel.eps_60
This screen is called the “Tone selection screen.”
Tones indicated by
recommended.
is called an “EX voice.” These voices are especially
Tones indicated by
mark is the 88-key multisampled piano tone.
Tones indicated by the red
or
mark produce the “Key Off Sound.”
What “Key Off Sound” does is recreate the tonal changes produced when the fingers
are released from the keys.
Tones indicated by the blue
icon sound “playing noises” when some keys are
played. “Playing noises” refer to noises such as the sound of guitar strings as they
are rubbed and other sounds that enhance realism in performance expression.
Tones indicated by “GS” is GS tones.
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other tones.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
You can touch <Audition> for an audio demonstration of a particular tone.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
You can touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through the list.
You can touch <Effects> to add effect sounds to a variety of tones (p. 46).
You can do searches for tones according to search parameters or by name by
touching <Search> (p. 30).
2.
3.
Touch a tone name to select the tone.
You’ll hear the tone you’ve selected when you play the keyboard.
You can use the dial to scroll through the screen as you switch the Tones to be
played.
Press the [Exit] button.
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
■ Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects
You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal
sounds.
fig.panel1-2
1.
2.
Press the [Super Tones] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch < > < > several times to display the “Drums” screen or the
“SFX (SOUND EFFECT)” screen.
fig.d-drum.eps_60
Touch here to switch these screens.
Drums screen
SFX screen
Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound.
You can also have play sounds by touching the screen.
The combination of sounds
assigned to the keyboard
varies according to the drum
set. Take a look at the “Drum
Set List” (p. 205) and “SFX
Set”(p. 208).
You can select other drum tones by pressing the <
> or <
> buttons.
3.
Press the [Exit] button several times.
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search)
You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical
style. You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name.
1.
2.
Press any Tone button.
The tone selection screen appears.
Touch <Search>.
The following “Tone search screen” appears.
fig.d-tonesrch1.eps_60
Condition Search screen
Name Search screen
Touch here to switch these screens.
Searching by Conditions
3.
4.
Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the dial to select the search
In condition search, tones
satisfying all of the selected
search criteria are sought.
conditions.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the tone name to select the tone.
After selecting the tone, press the [Exit] button several times to return to the tone
selection screen.
Searching by Tone Name
3
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen.
4.
Decide which character is to be used for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you’re searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touching <A-0> selects the type of character. Each time you touch <A-0>, the
character switches between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the tone name to select the Tone.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous
screen.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Performing with Multiple Sounds
Layered Together (Layer)
Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a “layer
performance.”
For instance, it’s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously.
fig.layer.e
Grand Piano 1
Strings 1
Strings 2
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
1.
Touch <Layer 1> on the Basic screen.
the lyrics data, <
>
fig.d-layer.eps_60
appears in the Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 39).
The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone
indicated in the lower part of the display, are now played together.
Here, the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the “upper tone,”
and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the “layer tone.”
In the same manner, you can touch <Layer 2> to layer further sounds.
When you touch Octave
<-><+> on the tone selection
screen, the pitch of the
keyboard’s sound is changed
in octave units. To learn more,
see “Shifting the Keyboard
Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave
Shift)” (p. 33).
Changing the Tones
2.
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
Touch here to highlight the tone name.
3.
4.
Press a Tone button to select the new tone (p. 28).
When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.
You can change the balance of
the Upper and Layer Tone
volume. For instructions, see
“Adjusting the Volume
The display returns to the Basic screen.
Cancelling the Layer
5.
Touch <Layer 1>.
Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 73).
Touch <Layer 2> to have <Layer 2> play as well.
The <Layer 1> and <Layer 2> icons are dimmed, and the Layer performance is
cancelled.
Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Playing Different Tones with the Left
and Right Hands (Split)
Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different
sounds in each section is called “split performance.” The boundary key is called the
“split point.”
The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to
You can change the split point;
refer to “Changing the
Keyboard’s Split Point (Split
Point)” (p. 162).
the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to “F#3.”
fig.split.e
Split Point
Acoustic Bass
Grand Piano 1
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
1.
At the Basic screen, touch <Split>.
fig.d-split.eps_60
the lyrics data, <
>
appears in the Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 39).
The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section
of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
Here, the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the “upper tone,”
<-> <+> in the tone selection
screen, the pitch of the
You can turn the tones on and off by touching <Lower 1> or <Lower 2>.
Changing the Tones
keyboard’s sound is changed
in octave units. To learn more,
see “Shifting the Keyboard
Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave
Shift)” (p. 33).
2.
3.
4.
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
Press a Tone button to select the tone (p. 28).
When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
You can change the volume
balance between the upper and
lower parts of the keyboard;
refer to “Adjusting the Volume
Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 73).
Cancelling the Split
5.
Touch <Split>.
The <Split> icons are dimmed, and the Split performance is cancelled.
When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously
Turning on either Layer Performance or Split Performance allows you to divide the
keyboard into a upper and a lower part and play with two Tones layered in the lower
When the keyboard has been
sections, the damper pedal is
section. If you want to add
lingering reverberations to the
notes of the lower section, see
“Assigning Functions to
part, and three Tones layered in the upper part.
fig.d-layersplit.eps_60
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 167).
■ Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps
(Octave Shift)
When using layer performance (p. 31) or split performance (p. 32), you can change
the pitch of the keyboard’s sound in octave units. This function is called “Octave
Shift.”
For example, when playing a Layer performance, if you change the pitch of one of
the tones and then layer it, it changes the impression created with the tone.
1.
On the Basic screen, touch <Layer1> or <Split>.
The KR switches to layer performance or split performance.
2.
3.
To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone you’ve selected.
Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen.
fig.d-octshift.eps_60
4.
Touch Octave <-> or <+> in the lower part of the screen to adjust the
pitch of the sound.
Each time you touch <+>, the pitch is raised one octave.
Each time you touch <->, the pitch is lowered one octave.
The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (-2) to
two octaves above the original (+2).
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)
Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR.
Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall.
fig.panel1-3
1.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the its indicator light up.
A “Reverb screen” like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-reverb.eps_60
Touch
to switch the screens.
2.
Touch an icon to select the performance space.
;
Display
Explanation
Hall with bright reverberation
Hall1
Hall2
Hall with warm reverberation
Room reverberation
Room1
Cathedral
Ground
Room2
Lounge
Studio
High-ceilinged cathedral
Wide open space with no reverberations
Small room
Larger room
A recording studio
Gymnasium
Hall3
In a gymnasium
Large concert hall reverberation
A domed ballpark
Dome
Cave
Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave
GS Room1
GS Room2
GS Room3
Reproduces an indoor-type reverb.
Provides a clear, expansive reverberation.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Display
GS Hall1
Explanation
Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives
reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room.
GS Hall2
Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the
vibrations of a metal plate).
GS Plate
A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the
reflected sounds of mountain echoes.
GS Delay
GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally.
No effect is applied when the
slider is moved all the way to
the left. In this case, the
3.
Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected.
Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the
button’s indicator won’t light
up when you press the
left for less.
You can also move the slider with the dial.
[Surround/Reverb] button.
When you press the [Exit] button, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the
previous screen.
Cancelling the Effect
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button, and watch the indicator light go out.
4.
The reverb effect is eliminated.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding the Surround Sound Effect to
the Accompaniment Using External
Speakers (Surround)
You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux Output jacks and play
accompaniment and reverb sounds through it. By using an external speaker this
way, it will seem that you are surrounded by the accompaniment or reverb. This is
called the “surround effect.”
fig.panel1-4
■ Giving More Breadth to the Accompaniment Sound
1.
2.
3.
Connect amp or external speaker to the Aux output jacks.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround>.
The “Surround Screen” appears.
NOTE
For more on speaker settings
when the Surround function is
used, refer to “Connecting
External Speakers” (p. 194).
4
Touch the Type icon <Surround>.
5.
When you have selected the type, press the [Exit] button.
NOTE
Only Advanced 3D can be
switched on and off when
nothing is connected to the
Aux Output jacks.
Cancelling the Effect
6.
Touch the Type icon <Surround> and watch the light go out.
The surround effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of the
parts.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Selecting the Part for the Effect
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround>.
On the Surround Screen, press the [Option] button.
The following screen appears.
fig.d-adv3d.eps_60
ON
OFF
No surround effect is applied,
even if the Type icon indicates
“On,” if all parts are switched
off.
4.
5.
Touch the icon to switch individual parts on or off.
When you press the [Exit] button, the Surround effect is activated, and you return to
the previous screen.
Touch a part’s icon to switch the surround on and off.
When you select the
<Surround>, you can adjust
the volume of the external and
built-in speakers (p. 38).
The sounds of parts set to ON are played from the external speaker and the KR’s
internal speaker. Parts set to OFF are played only from the KR’s speaker.
When you press the [Exit] button, the surround effect is activated, and you return to
the previous screen.
■ Selecting the Tone to Which the Effect is Applied
With “Keyboard” in Surround set to On, you can select the parts to which the
surround effect is to be applied.
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround> to display the Surround screen.
On the Surround Screen, press the [Option] button.
Touch
to display the following screen.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
4.
Touch <All Parts> or <Layer Part>.
Display
Explanation
The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard (the left-
hand tone, right-hand tone, and layer tone).
All Parts
The effect is applied only to the layer part.
When not using a layer performance (p. 31), the Surround effect is not
applied to the keyboard performance, even if <Keyboard> on the
Surround Screen is set to On.
Layer Part
When you press the [Exit] button, you return to the Surround Screen.
■ Changing the Amount of Surround Effect
This setting is enabled only
when the <Surround> type
icon is selected.
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround> to display the Surround screen.
On the Surround Screen, press the [Option] button.
Touch
to display the following screen.
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
4.
Touch the “Int” and “Ext” sliders to adjust the volume levels of the
external speaker and the KR’s speaker.
When you press the [Exit] button, you return to the Surround screen.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Three-Dimensional Spatiality to the
Accompaniment Sounds (Advanced 3D)
You can add three-dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic
accompaniment (p. 57), or to internal songs or music files. With this effect, called
“Advanced 3D,” you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance.
fig.panel1-4
1.
2.
3
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround>.
<
> appears in the screen
when headphones are
connected.
On the Surround Screen, touch the Type icon <Advanced 3D>.
Three-dimensional breadth is added to the sound.
❍ Adding Depth to Sounds Played Through Headphones
When you have headphones connected, the screen for selecting the type of surround
effect changes as shown below.
* You cannnot select the Type icon <Surround> or <Ensemble> when headphones
are connected.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Selecting the Part for the Effect
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround> to display the Surround screen.
Press the [Option] button.
The following screen appears.
fig.d-adv3d.eps_60
ON
OFF
4.
Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part.
When you press the [Exit] button, the Advanced 3D effect is activated, and you
return to the previous screen.
Cancelling the Effect
Touch the Type icon <Advanced 3D> and watch the light go out.
5.
The Advanced 3D effect is not
applied, even when you touch
<ON>, if all parts are turned
off.
The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of
the parts.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Selecting the tone to which the effect is applied
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround> to display the Surround screen.
Press the [Option] button.
4.
Touch
to display the following screens.
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
5.
6.
Touch the icon to select the value.
Parameter
Display
Explanation
The effect is applied to all tones played with the
keyboard (the lower tone, upper tone, and layer
tone).
All Parts
The effect is applied only to the layer part.
When not using a layer performance (p. 31), the
Advanced 3D effect is not applied to the keyboard
performance, even if <Keyboard> on the Surround
Option screen is set to On.
Part
Layer Part
When you press the [Exit] button, you return to the Surround screen.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Making Detailed Settings for Advanced 3D
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Surround/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Surround> to display the Surround screen.
Press the [Option] button.
4.
Touch
to display the following screens.
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
5.
Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
Parameter
Display
Explanation
This selects settings that are adjusted for use with
headphones when headphones are connected.
When no headphones are connected, settings
adjusted for speakers are selected.
Auto
Mode
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through
speakers are selected.
Speaker
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through
headphones are selected.
Headphone
Changes the apparent depth of the sound. The
effect is applied more as the value is increased.
Depth
Width
1–4
1–128
Changes the breadth of the sound.
You can also change the value with the dial.
6.
When you press the [Exit] button, you return to the Surround screen.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding Liveliness to the Sound
(Dynamic Emphasis)
You can add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness.
fig.panel2-8
1
Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the “Dynamic Emphasis
screen.”
The Dynamic Emphasis function is switched on, enlivening the sound.
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
2
Touch the Type icon to select the type.
Indicator
Sharp
Description
Creates a sound with boosted bass and treble.
Produces a sound with chords in the low registers that are
clear and distinct.
Clear
Power
Creates a sound with boosted bass.
Cancelling the Dynamics Emphasis
3
Press the [Sound Control] button once more, and the indicator light goes
out.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the
Preferred Tone Quality (Equalizer)
The KR features a built-in, five-band digital equalizer.
An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches (frequency ranges) to adjust the
sound balance for the overall performance. For example, you can boost the highs to
get a crisper sound, or boost the low end for a more powerful sound.
You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the
performance space.
If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound, you can correct
the distortion with the Master Level slider.
1
Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the “Dynamic Emphasis
screen.”
2.
Touch <Equalizer>.
The “Equalizer screen” appears.
fig.d-eq.eps_60
3.
Touch the Type icon to make your selection.
Display
Piano
Power
Mild
Explanation
Boosts both the low- and high-frequency ranges.
Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant-sounding tone.
This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling.
This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant, sparkling sound.
All slider values are set to “0.”
Clear
Bright
Flat
User
Store your own preferred settings (p. 45).
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
4.
Touch the slider to make adjustment.
Settings
Displayed
Explanation
Value
Low-frequency range. This is the range of
-60–0–+60 frequencies for instruments like drums, bass,
organ, guitar and strings.
Low
–
Mid-low-frequency range. This is the range of
-60–0–+60 frequencies for lower brass and woodwind
instruments.
Midrange. This is the range of frequencies where
-60–0–+60
Mid
–
most instrument sounds are concentrated.
Mid-high-frequency range. The ear is most
-60–0–+60
sensitive to this frequency range.
High-frequency range. These frequencies add
brilliance to the sound.
High
-60–0–+60
You can temper the distortion in the sound by
-60–0–+60 lowering the level. Raising the level too much may
cause the sound to become distorted.
Master Level
You can also move the slider with the dial.
When you press the [Exit] button, the equalization is placed in effect, and you return
to the previous screen.
Cancelling the Effect
Touch <Flat>.
❍ Storing the Settings
5.
You can store adjusted equalizer settings to <User>.
Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to call up your preferred
settings.
1.
2.
Press the [Sound Control] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Equalizer>.
The “Equalizer screen” appears.
3.
4.
Adjust the equalizer.
Touch <Write>.
The settings are stored.
Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to select the stored settings.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)
You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the
For more on the effect types,
refer to the “Effects List” (p.
209).
keyboard.
1.
2.
First, press the Tone button to select a Tone (p. 28).
The “Tone selection screen” appears.
Then, touch <Effects>.
The “Effects screen” appears.
fig.d-effects.eps_60
Applying Effects to the Sound
3.
Touch <ON>.
The effect selected with <Type> will be applied.
Selecting the Type of Effect
Touch <Type>
Setting the Effect
NOTE
You may find effects not being
applied to certain parts when
different effects are applied to
the upper tone, layer tone, and
lower tone. In such instances,
you can select which effect is
to have priority (p. 179).
4.
to select the type of effect.
The parameters that can be set change according to the type selected in Step 4.
5.
Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
You can also move the slider with the dial.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Tone selection screen.
Cancelling the Effect
On the Effects screen, touch <OFF>.
6.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding Effects to Mic Vocals
(Vocal Effect)
For details on connecting a
microphone, refer to
“Connecting a Microphone”
(p. 23).
With a microphone connected, you can add effects to the microphone vocals.
Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as “Vocal Effect.”
❍ How to select Vocal Effect
fig.panel1-5
1.
2.
Press the [Vocal Effects] button.
The “Vocal Effects screen” appears.
fig.d-vocalsfx.eps_60
Touch any one of the icons.
CD drive, you can play back
Icon
Explanation
Page
effects to vocal parts on CDs.
Echo
Adjusts the microphone echo.
Alters the microphone vocals.
Adds harmonies to the original voice.
p. 48
p. 48
p. 49
Transformer
Harmonist
Allows you to start songs and Automatic
Accompaniment using your own tempo.
Vocal Count In
Vocal Keyboard
Music Files
p. 50
p. 51
p. 52
Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the
vocal scale.
You can play a specific part as harmony while
playing back a song.
You can adjust the microphone
volume with the Mic Volume
knob on the (left) underside of
the KR.
3.
When you press the [Exit] button, the effect is applied and you return to
the previous screen.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Cancelling the Vocal Effect
4.
Press the [Vocal Effects] button and watch the indicator light go out.
The Vocal Effect function is cancelled.
❍ Adjusting the Echo (Echo)
1.
Touch <Echo> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 47).
fig.d-vo-echo.eps_60
2.
3.
Touch the Echo Type <1> or <2> to change the echo type.
Displayed
Explanation
Adds basic reverberations.
Adds reverberations for a karaoke-type echo.
1
2
Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
❍ Altering Vocals (Transformer)
You can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone. This is called
the “Voice Transformer” function.
1.
Touch <Transformer> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 47).
fig.d-vo-trans.eps_60
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
2.
3.
Touch any one of the icons.
Here’s what the different icons do.
Display
Explanation
Kids
Transforms the input into the sound of a child’s voice.
Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal.
Transforms the input into the sound of a robot’s voice.
Transforms the input into a duck’s quacking sound.
Transforms the input into an alien voice.
Bear
Robot
Duck
Alien
Computer
Female
Male
Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer.
Transforms male voices into female voices.
Transforms female voices into male voices.
Sing through the microphone.
Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected.
Cancelling the Effect
Once again, touch the icon you selected in Step 2.
4.
The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
❍ Adding Harmonies (Harmonist)
You can sing with a harmony accompaniment, even when you’re playing solo. This
is called the “Harmonist” function.
1.
Touch <Harmonist> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 47).
Touch
to switch the screen.
fig.d-vo-harmo.eps_60
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
2.
Touch any one of the icons.
Here’s what the different icons do.
Display
Explanation
Unison
Oct-Up
Sounds like two people singing the same melody.
Adds another voice one octave higher than the original.
Adds another voice one octave lower than the original.
Adds harmony a fifth above the original.
Oct-Down
5th Up
3rd Up
Adds harmony a third above the original.
4th Down
Adds harmony a major fourth below the original.
The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.
The harmony is added to your voice regardless of the pitch.
My Voice
Duo 1
Duo 2
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard. Adding harmony to a single voice gives the effect of
two people singing together.
The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.
pitches are used for female voices, lower pitches for male voices.
Variety
Trio
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard. This adds a two-voice harmony that makes it seem that
a trio is singing.
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard.
You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody
Intelligence type (p. 70).
Chords
Cancelling the Effect
Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again.
3.
The Harmonist function is cancelled.
❍ Enabling the Start of Songs and Automatic Accompaniment with the
Sound of Your Voice (Vocal Count In)
You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the
microphone.
1.
Touch <Vocal Count In> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 47).
fig.d-vo-coin.eps_60
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
2.
3.
Touch <Arranger> or <Song>.
Display
Explanation
Arranger
Song
Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count.
The song starts at the tempo used for the count.
Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the microphone.
Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song
or Music Style.
For example, if you select a time signature of 4/4, then count to four; count to three
when 3/4 time is selected.
The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
❍ Playing Instrument Sounds at Vocal Pitches (Vocal Keyboard)
You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KR’s internal
Tones.
1.
Touch <Vocal Keyboard> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 47).
fig.d-vo-key.eps_60
2.
3.
If the <OFF> icon is selected, touch the <ON> icon.
Touch any of the icons to select a Tone.
When you play the keys while
using Vocal Keyboard, the
tone selected for Vocal
Keyboard is played.
You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button.
When you sing into the microphone, the sung pitches are played using the selected
Tone.
Cancelling the Effect
4.
Touch <OFF>.
The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
❍ Adding Harmonies to a Specified Part (Music Files)
added based on pitches of the specified part.
1.
2.
Select the song to which you want to add harmony.
To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the
external memory port.
Touch <Music Files> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 47).
fig.d-vo-music.eps_60
3.
4.
Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony.
When you play back the song and sing into the microphone, harmonies are added
using the pitches of the specified part.
Touch <Variety>.
When <Variety> is ON, the melody played on the keyboard is played as the
harmony. The harmony added is matched to the pitch.
Cancelling the Effect
Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again.
5.
The Music Files function is cancelled.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files
Commercial music files
designed for “karaoke” sing-
along are also available.
Consult your KR dealer when
purchasing music files. Refer
Can Use” (p. 217).
1.
2.
Connect a microphone.
Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied.
On the KR, use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo (p. 48).
Harmonist function (p. 49).
3.
Select a song.
To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the
external memory port. For instructions on how to select songs, refer to “Playing a
Song” (p. 75).
On the KR, lyrics can also be
Refer to “Connecting an
External Display” (p. 185) and
“Changing the Settings for
Showing Images with the
Television (External Display)”
(p. 186).
4.
5.
Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons.
If necessary, change the key of the song (Transpose: p. 102).
When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the accompaniment starts playing.
Sing along with the accompaniment.
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
6.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop the accompaniment.
You can stop lyrics from being
displayed. Refer to “Hiding
the Lyrics (Lyrics)” (p. 182).
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Using the Metronome
The KR features a built-in metronome. During playback of the song and
accompaniment, the metronome plays at that tempo and beat.
fig.panel1-6
■ Using the Metronome
1.
Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.
You will hear the metronome.
The following “Metronome screen” appears.
fig.d-metro.eps_60
You can press the [Exit] button to have the metronome continue to play while you
return to the previous screen.
Stopping the Metronome
2.
Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes
out.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Changing the Metronome Settings
❍ Adjusting the Tempo
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo and beat of the metronome
changes automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song.
1.
Press the Tempo [-] or [+] buttons to adjust a tempo.
You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of
= 10–500.
Pressing the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song
accompaniment to the basic tempo.
❍ Changing the Beat of the Metronome
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.
Select the beat with the dial.
When
is selected,
only the upbeat will sound.
❍ Changing the Volume
The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels.
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.
Select the volume with the dial.
Choosing
sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing
sets
it to the highest level.
Choose
to silence the metronome sound.
❍ Changing the Type of Sound
You can change the sound the metronome makes.
The setting is at “Normal metronome sound” when the KR is powered up.
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.
Select the sound with the dial.
Displayed
Explanation
Displayed
Explanation
Normal metronome
sound
Electronic metronome
sound
“1, 2, 3” in Japanese
“1, 2, 3” in English
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Displayed
Explanation
Displayed
Explanation
Wood block
Dog and cat sounds
Triangle and castanet
Hand clap
❍ Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern) Sounds
You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals.
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>.
Select the pattern with the dial.
Displayed
Explanation
Usual sound
Displayed
Explanation
Dotted half-note intervals
Dotted quarter-note
intervals
Half-note intervals
Dotted eighth-note
intervals
Quarter-note intervals
Eighth-note intervals
Single back beat added
Shuffle rhythm added
Sixteenth-note intervals
Triplet rhythm added
❍ Turning Off the Beat Light (Beat Indicator)
The beat light flashes in time with the metronome, accompaniment Styles, and song
tempos, but you can set it so that it stays off at all times.
1.
2.
Touch <Beat LED> in the Metronome screen.
Select ON/OFF (Beat Indicator off) with the dial.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment
What is Automatic Accompaniment?
For instructions on playing the
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button for Automatic Accompaniment’s
optimum settings. Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with
accompaniment in a variety of musical genres, just by specifying chords in the left
hand. Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra, even when
performing alone!
Automatic Accompaniment,
refer to “Selecting Music Styles
(Music Style Buttons)” (p. 61).
What Are Music Styles?
Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called “Music Styles.”
There are many different kinds of music around the world, and each has its own
unique features. What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a
unique combination of elements like instrumentation, melody, and phrasing, which
interact to create the musical character.
Elements of Music Styles
A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called “divisions.”
Division
Intro
Explanation
Played at the start of a song.
Original
The basic accompaniment pattern.
Variation
This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original.
Fill In To Original
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the
variation.
Fill In To
Variation
Ending
The conclusion of a song.
In addition, the accompaniment Styles are composed of up to a maximum of eight
performance parts: “Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment 2,”
“Accompaniment 3,” “Accompaniment 4,” “Accompaniment 5,” and
“Accompaniment 6.”
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment
(One-Touch Arranger)
Here’s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel2-1
1.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The Basic screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 39).
tone change to selections that
go well with the selected
Music Style. If you do not want
to change the tempo and tone,
refer to “Changing Music
Setting)” (p. 162).
Observe the settings:
• The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment
chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard.
• A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen.
• The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set.
2.
3.
Play a chord on the Lower-part of keyboard.
For instructions on selecting
Music Styles, refer to
The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro.
Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right.
Style Buttons)” (p. 61).
When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes.
fig.arr-split.e
Split Point (
)
F
3
For instructions on starting
and stopping the
Accompaniment” (p. 65).
The range specifyed a chord
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
You can change the range in
which chords are played.
Please refer to “Changing the
Keyboard’s Split Point (Split
Point)” (p. 162).
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ About Chords
A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are
indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord (the root) and the chord
type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord.
For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note “C” and the chord
type “m” (minor). C m is made up of the three notes “C,” “E ” and “G.”
“C m” is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen.
fig.chord.e
Cm
E
Chord Type
Root Note
C
G
Root Note
All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with
correspond to the notes shown below.
or
added, and
fig.chord-root.e
Chord Intelligence function are
selected, but there may be
settings that are not used. You
can also change the rules
■ Playing Chords with Simple Fingering
(Chord Intelligence)
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the
moment you play a key.
governing how chords are
played. For more information,
see “Changing How Chords
Are Played and Specified
To play a “C” chord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and
G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C key to start a “C” chord
accompaniment.
(Arranger Config)” (p. 162).
fig.chord-intel.e
• Intelligence 1
Major
Minor
Ex: C m
Ex:
C
Play the root and
the third key above it.
Play the chord root.
For more information about
chord fingering, refer to the
“Chord List” (p. 212).
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Minor Seventh
Ex: C m7
Play the root and
the second key below it.
Play the root,
the third key above it, and
the second key below it.
Major Seventh
Ex: C maj 7
Diminished
Ex:
C dim
Play the root and
the first key below it.
Play the root and
the sixth key above it.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder)
Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes
of the chord on the screen.
1.
On the Basic screen, touch <
>.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
2.
Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about.
The chord fingering appears on screen.
fig.d-crdfind.eps_60
For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch
<C>, then touch <#>.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Basic screen.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons)
You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons.
Four different preset styles are assigned to the Music Style.
fig.panel2-2
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
For more on the Music Style
names, refer to the “Music
Style List (KR117)” (p. 210).
Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group.
Watch the indicator button light up.
Five of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen.
fig.d-stylesel.eps_60
This screen is called the “Style Selection screen.”
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other styles.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
You can touch <Search> to find Styles that match the selected criteria (p. 62).
3.
4.
You can use the dial to automatically switch pages and select Styles.
Touch Preset <A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> in the lower part of the screen.
When the Music Style is selected, Preset A is selected.
When any of the Presets from <A> through <D> are selected, the Music Style tempo,
Upper Tone, Style Orchestrator settings (p. 69) and other settings change.
5.
Press the [Exit] button.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
When you play a chord in the left-hand part of the keyboard, the selected Music Style
is automatic.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles
(Style Search)
You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or
other criteria you set.
Only the KR’s internal Music
Styles are searchable.
You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names.
1.
2.
Press one of the Music Style buttons.
Touch <Search>.
The following “Style Search screen” appears.
fig.d-stylsrch1.eps_60
Condition Search screen
Name Search screen
Touch here to switch these screens.
In a condition search, the KR
looks for Music Styles
satisfying all of the selected
search criteria.
❍ Searching by Conditions
3.
4.
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search
conditions.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Search screen.
❍ Searching by Music Style Name
3.
4.
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
Decide which character you’ll use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear on the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous
screen.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Selecting Music Styles on External Memories
You can play other User Styles saved to external memories (sold separately) or User
memory (p. 158).
fig.panel2-3
1.
Press the Music Style [User] button.
fig.d-styldisk.eps_60
2.
3.
Touch <User> in the lower left of the screen.
When you touch <User> on the lower part of the screen, the screen for selecting user
memory or external memory Styles appears.
Touching <Preset> in the lower left of this screen returns you to the screen for
selecting the “Trad/World” accompaniment Styles.
Touch <
> <
> to select the storage media to which the
accompaniment Style is saved.
The names of the accompaniment styles stored on the selected storage media are
displayed.
4.
5.
Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
You can save multiple user
Styles to user memory. Take a
look at “Saving a User Style”
(p. 158).
You can now perform in the selected Music Style.
Music Styles selected from external memories are stored until the power is turned
off. Even after ejecting the external memory, by pressing the Music Style [User]
button, you can perform using the most recently selected Music Style.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns
You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles.
fig.panel2-4
NOTE
1.
2.
Select a Music Style (p. 61).
Some Music Styles do not
include rhythm patterns.
When you select these Style
patterns, no rhythm patterns
are played, even when you
play on the left side of the
keyboard.
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played.
3.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro.
Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by
pressing the [Intro/Ending] button, and make changes to the rhythm patterns with
the Fill In button (p. 68).
Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo
fig.panel2-5
When the Basic screen is displayed, you can use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the dial
to change the tempo.
The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
Pressing the Tempo [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style
or song to the basic tempo.
You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the
accompaniment is playing.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment
Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for the
accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on
the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for
the accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and
stops.
fig.panel2-6
■ Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously
When You Play the Keyboard (Sync Start)
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,
causing the indicators of both buttons to flash.
The Sync Start settings go into effect.
Sync Start is set immediately
after the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button is pressed.
2.
Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
As you play the keys, the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously.
❍ Changing the Intro
When set for Sync Start (the indicators of both the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/
Stop] button are flashing), you can use the following procedure to change the intro,
or prevent the intro from playing.
Starting without an Intro
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and watch the indicator go out.
Now when you play a chord with the keyboard, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.
To Start with a Short Intro Added
Touch <Arranger> in the Basic screen to open the arranger screen.
Touch the Intro <2>.
fig.d-intro2.eps_60
Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard, a short intro is played, and the
accompaniment starts.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
❍ Starting at the Press of a Button
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,
and the indicators lights go out.
The Sync Start function is cancelled.
2.
3.
Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard.
Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.
When you press the [Intro/Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment
starts. When you press the [Start/Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.
When you touch Intro <2> on the Basic screen, a short intro plays.
You can change the sound of
the chord tone and bass tone.
Take a look at “Changing How
Chords Are Played and
Specified (Arranger Config)”
(p. 162).
Chord Tones and Bass Tones
When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/Stop]
button’s indicator is not lit, chords play. This note is called the “Chord Tone,” and
the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.”
■ Stopping Automatic Accompaniment
❍ Stopping with an Added Ending
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops.
❍ Stopping at the Same Time the Button is Pressed
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the
Intro (Countdown)
If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to
the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start playing.
fig.countdown.e
When the Intro has finished playing,
the accompaniment plays.
Ex: 4/4
Intro
1
2
3
4
Count Sound
1.
2.
Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Count screen” appears.
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60
When set to “Count In/
song begins.
Touch <Count Mode>
In/Down.”
to set this to “Count Down” or “Count
When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, the performance starts,
and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro.
For more about settings on the
Countdown screen, refer to
“Changing the Settings for the
Count” (p. 164).
❍ Cancelling the Countdown
Press the [Count/Marker] button and the indicator light goes out.
3.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Modifying an Accompaniment
You can add variation to the
Automatic Accompaniment by
assigning different functions to
the Performance Pads and
pedals. For more information,
see “Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
When you use Automatic Accompaniment, you can easily add Fill Ins to the
accompaniment patterns, change arrangements, and make other changes.
■ Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
(Fill In Buttons)
There are two accompaniment patterns: the Original, and a Variation. In addition, a
fill-in (or short phrase) is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns
change, which adds more interest to the song. It can be effective to use the simpler
original pattern for the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second
half.
Functions)” (p. 167).
What’s a “Fill In”?
A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a “Fill In.”
The KR automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style.
fig.panel2-7
Press the Fill In [To Variation] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played.
Press the Fill In [To Original] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played.
Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in at the
appropriate place and time.
Adding a Fill-in without Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
You can play only the fill-in, without changing the accompaniment pattern.
Press the lit [To Original] or [To Variation] Fill In button during the performance.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen
You can change accompaniment patterns in intros, fill-ins, endings, and so on by
touching the screen. This lets you enjoy even more advanced performances.
1.
2.
Press the One Touch [Arranger] button.
The Arranger basic screen is displayed.
Touch <Arranger>.
The following screen appears.
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60
For more information about
leading bass, refer to p. 168.
Touch the screen to change the accompaniment pattern.
■ Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles
(Style Orchestrator)
You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment. This function is called “Style
Orchestrator.” Each Music Style has three different accompaniment arrangements.
fig.panel2-8
1.
2.
Press the [Style Orchestrator] button and watch the indicator light up.
When you press the [User
Function] buttons, the [Style
Orchestrator] button’s
The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads.
Press Performance Pad [1]–[3] to change the arrangement for the
accompaniment.
indicator goes out, and the
function of the Performance
Pads changes. For details refer
to p. 94 and p. 167.
Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up.
.
Button
1 (Basic)
Explanation
This is the simplest arrangement.
This is a more involved arrangement.
This is the most elavorate arrangement.
When simple Music Styles are
selected, there may be no
change in the arrangement
even when you use the Style
Orchestrator function.
2 (Advanced)
3 (Full)
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand
Part (Melody Intelligence)
You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard.
While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is
automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand. This function
is called “Melody Intelligence.”
fig.panel2-10
1.
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button and watch the indicator light up.
When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, harmony is
added.
The following “Melody Intelligence screen” appears.
fig.d-melointel.eps_60
2.
3.
Select and touch a harmony type.
Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically
added.
With some harmonies, Tones
may change automatically.
Also, when you play several
keys at the same time, in some
cases harmony may be added
to one note.
When you press the [Exit] button, you’re returned to the previous screen, while the
Melody Intelligence function remains selected.
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button once more and the indicator light
goes out.
The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a
Performance (Lower Tone)
Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not
produced by playing the left-hand part of the keyboard. When you touch the
<Lower 1> or <Lower 2> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard
play simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment.
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This sets the Automatic Accompaniment.
On the Basic screen, touch <Lower 1>.
Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will
sound, and the accompaniment chord changes.
In the same manner, you can play the lower tone by touching <Lower 2>.
By touching both <Lower 1> and <Lower 2>, you can get a Layer performance for
the left-hand.
fig.d-lower.eps_60
Stopping the Sound in the Left-hand
3.
Touch <Lower 1>.
The <Lower 1> icon returns to the original color.
To have <Lower 2> play as well, also touch <Lower 2>.
The lower Tones stop playing.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
(Piano Style Arranger)
Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of
the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand side. Chords can also be recognized
over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment
without splitting the keyboard. This function is called “Piano Style Arranger.”
This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song
by playing chords in the ordinary way, without giving any thought to the location
of a keyboard split.
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off.
fig.d-pianist.eps_60
3.
4.
Select a Music Style (p. 61).
Play the keyboard.
The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each
Part (Balance)
You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard,
and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style.
■ Changing the Volume Balance Between the
NOTE
Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob)
When this knob is turned
completely to the
You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the
Accompaniment side, no
sounds from the keyboard are
audible, even when the keys
are pressed. You can usually
leave the knob at the center
position.
notes you play on the keyboard.
1.
Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob.
fig.volbal.e
■ Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each
Performance Part (Part Balance)
You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the
balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard.
fig.panel2-11
1.
Press the [Part Balance] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Part Balance screen” appears.
fig.d-partbal2.eps_60
Switch the screens
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated.
Display
Performance part
Music Style Rhythm Part
Rhythm
Bass
Music Style Bass Part
Accomp1
Accomp2
Accomp3
Accomp4
Accomp5
Accomp6
Chord Tone
Bass Tone
WAV
Accompaniment 1–6
Chord Tone (p. 66)
Bass Tone (p. 66)
Audio File
CD
(Only with models
featuring CD Drive)
Audio CD
When you touch <Keyboard>, a screen like the following appears.
fig.d-partbal1.eps_60
Switch the screens
This shows the volume balance between the keyboard’s Tones when either layer
performance (p. 31) or split performance (p. 32) are used, or the volume balance
when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects (p. 29).
Displayed
Drm/SFX
Upper
Tone Part
Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys
Upper Tone
Lower Tone 1
Lower Tone 2
Layer Tone 1
Layer Tone 2
Lower 1
Lower 2
Layer 1
Layer 2
When you touch <Accomp>, you return to the screen for setting the accompaniment
Style volume balance.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Playing a Song
Now, let’s try practicing while playing back internal songs, commercial music files,
and songs saved to external memories.
You can use rewind or fast-forward to go to any desired measure, and play back
from that point.
You can also play audio files (p. 80).
fig.panel3-1
Record/Playback buttons
Selecting the Song
When playing back songs on optional external memory, first connect the external
memory to the external memory port.
1.
Press the [Song] button.
The following “Song Selection screen” appears.
fig.d-songsel.eps_60
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other songs.
About Random Performances
When “Favorites” is selected as
the genre, songs registered in
“Favorites” are played back in
random order.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
: The fingering is included in the notation.
: The chords are indicated in the notation.
: You can display song lyrics.
When “External Memory” is
selected as the genre, the songs
in the folder appearing on the
screen are played back in
random order.
: For audio files.
When you touch <
>, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in
>, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played
random order.
When you touch <
in order, starting from the selected song. When the last song is finished, playback
resumes from the first song in the genre.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
<
>: The selected song is played back. This changes to <
is played back; playback stops when you touch <
> while the song
>.
If there is recorded song data,
the “Delete song” screen
appears.
By touching <File>, you can then view information about the song (p. 182) and save
songs to external memory (p. 116).
2.
3.
Touch <
><
> to select the song genre.
If it’s okay to delete the song,
touch <OK>. If you do not
want to delete the song, touch
<Cancel>, and either save the
song to a external memory (p.
116) or register the song to the
Favorites (p. 82).
Touch the name of the song to be played back.
You use and the dial to select songs.
Playing back
Press the [
4.
(Play/Stop)] button.
The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins.
Stopping the Song
Press the [
5.
(Play/Stop)] button once again.
The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.
When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.
Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song.
NOTE
When you select a song, the
measure number in the Basic
screen is highlighted. The
performance data is being
loaded while the indication is
highlighted; please wait a few
moments for this to be
Record/Playback Buttons
fig.composer.e
completed.
Track buttons (Rhythm, Whole, Bass/Accomp, Lower, Upper):
Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these
buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed
information, refer to p. 97.
[
(Reset)] button: Returns to the beginning of the song.
[
(Play/Stop)] button:
Plays back the song, or if the song is currently being played, it stops the song.
NOTE
[
[
(Rec)] button: Records the performance. For more detailed information, refer to p. 104.
When using markers to specify
a section to be repeated (p.
101), you can rewind and fast
forward only within the range
between Marker A and
Marker B.
(Bwd)] button: Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time
the button is pressed. Moves back the playback position of the song one second each when an
audio file is being played back. When held down, the song “rewinds” continuously.
[
(Fwd)] button: Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the
button is pressed. Advances the playback position of the song one second each when an audio
file is being played back. When held down, the song is forwarded continuously.
Holding down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and pressing the [
(Fwd)] button moves
you to the end of the song.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
■ Listening to Songs on CDs (Only for Instrument
Equipped with CD Drive)
Cautions
Handling CDs
• Do not leave discs exposed to direct sunlight for extended periods.
• Handle CDs with your finger and thumb, holding the disc by the center hole and
outer rim. Do not touch or scratch the disc’s recording surface (the green side).
• Do not drop or stack discs.
• Do not place heavy objects on discs or subject them to strong impact.
• Do not affix stickers or other such materials on the label side. Placing stickers on
the disc may result in errors when data writing and scratch the disc.
• Use a felt-tip marker or other soft-tipped implement to write titles and other
information on the label side of discs.
• Store discs in their original cases or other suitable cases for protection.
• Before using the CD, please read the warning on the CD cover.
Cleaning Discs
• If a disc becomes dusty or soiled, gently wipe the disc with a soft cloth. Always
wipe outwards from the center using light, gentle strokes. Do not wipe the disk
in a circular pattern.
Precautions Concerning Use of the CD
• CD-R/RW discs to which audio tracks have been added, and CDs with mixed
audio tracks and data will not play back properly.
• The KR is capable of playing back only commercial CDs that conform the official
standards-those that carry the “COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO” logo. The
usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection
technology and other non-standard CDs cannot be guaranteed.
• For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection
technology and other non-standard CDs, please consult the disc vendor.
• You cannot save songs and styles to CDs, and you cannot delete songs or styles
recorded to CDs. Furthermore, you cannot format CDs.
• The prescribed format for CD-R/RW discs is “ISO9660 Level 1 Mode 1.”
• You may be unable to read using other formats.
NOTE
You may not be able to play
back certain commercially
available player piano CDs.
CDs That Can Be Played Back
• Commercially available audio CDs
• CD-ROMs containing saved SMF music files
• CD included with the KR
• Player piano CDs
• CDs created with the A/V Sync function (p. 122)
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Insert the CD in the CD Drive
1.
Press the eject button and open a disc tray.
fig.
Disc Tray
Eject Button
2.
3.
Put a CD on a disc tray.
Press the eject button again to close the disc tray.
Removing a CD
1.
2.
Press the eject button and open a disc tray.
Remove the CD from the disc tray.
If a disc tray does not open
If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive (such as due to a power
failure), the disc tray cannot be opened by pressing the eject button. In this case, you
can insert a piece of wire to force the tray open.
fig.
Emergency Eject Hole
Make sure the KR’s power has been turned OFF before attempting to engage the
emergency eject hole. If you insert something while the power is on, the disc could
be damaged, or unexpected problems may occur.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Playing Back Songs on CDs
You can play back the CD included with the KR, CDs with player piano CDs, audio
CDs, and CD-ROMs to which SMF music files are saved.
NOTE
1.
2.
Place the CD you want to play in the CD drive.
If there is any song data
already recorded, a screen
appears asking you to confirm
you do not mind erasing the
data, touch <OK>. If you do
not want to erase the data,
touch <Cancel>, and either
save the song data to the
Favorites or to external
Touch <
><
> to select “CD” as the genre.
If using the remote control, press the remote control’s [EXTERNAL] button, then
select “CD” as the genre.
3.
Press the [
] button to start playback of the CD’s songs.
The songs on the CD are played.
When the KR is set to play back all songs (p. 75), once the song currently being
played back is finished, the next song starts playing automatically. After all of the
songs on the CD have been played, playback automatically resumes from the
beginning of the CD. When the KR is set to play back a single song (p. 75), playback
stops automatically when the song is finished.
memory (p. 116)
4.
Press the [
] button once more to stop playback of the songs.
When Selecting Songs in Folders
1. Touch the folder name.
2. Touch <
(Play)> at the bottom left of the screen.
After a moment, a list of songs in the folder is displayed.
You can also select the folder using the dial or the [ (Bwd)] or [
button on the remote; the folder can then be opened by pressing the
(PLAY)] button.
(Fwd)]
[
3. Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to
play back.
NOTE
* Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder, this may take some time.
If a folder contains 500 or more
files and/or folders, some of
the files and folders may not
be displayed.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
About Audio Files
Audio files in the following format can be played back:
• “.WAV” extension
• 16 bit linear
• Sampling rate of “44.1 kHz”
• Stereo
You cannot use the following functions in playing back audio files.
• Marker (p. 98)
• Displaying notations (p. 87)
• Registering “Favorites” (p. 82)
• Transposing (p. 102)
• Changing tempos (p. 94)
• Track Mute (p. 97)
• Recording (p. 105)
• Search (p. 81)
* Saving or performing other procedures during playback of audio files may
cause the song to stop while it is playing.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
■ Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search)
You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo
or genre.
Only the KR’s internal songs
are searchable.
You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name.
1.
2.
Press the [Song] button.
Touch <
>.
The following “Song Search screen” appears.
fig.d-songsrch1.eps_60
Condition Search screen
Name Search screen
Touch here to switch these screens.
❍ Searching by Conditions
3.
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search
conditions.
With <Data>, songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Lyrics,” “Chords,” “Finger” (fingering
numbers), and “Any.” By selecting a song containing any of this data, then displaying
it in the KR’s notation, you can display information about the selected data.
4.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song Selection screen.
❍ Searching by Song Name
3.
4.
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
Decide which character you will use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)
allowing you to select these songs easily.
Selecting the Song
You can also register songs on
external memory to the
Favorites. For details, refer to
“Copying Songs on External
Memories to Favorites” (p.
120).
1.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Selection screen appears (p. 75).
fig.d-songsel.eps_60
2.
Touch the song name to select the song to be registered.
Registering to Favorites
3.
Touch <Favorites>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-fvrtadd.eps_60
NOTE
You cannot register audio files
and audio CD to the Favorites.
4.
Touch <OK>.
The selected song is registered to Favorites.
Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the
Song Selection screen.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
■ Removing Songs From Favorites
This deletes registered songs for Favorites.
1.
Touch <
> <
> in the Song Selection screen to select the
“Favorites” from the genre category.
fig.d-song-fvrt.eps_60
2.
3.
Touch the name of the song to be deleted.
Touch <Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-fvrtdel.eps_60
4.
Touch <OK>.
The song is deleted.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Using the Remote Control
Refer to “Installing Batteries in
the Remote Control” (p. 20).
You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and
switch songs.
■ How to Use the Remote Control
When using the remote control, aim the remote control at the infrared receiver,
keeping in mind the range of operation (below).
Infrared Receiver
CD Drive
Range of operation
Distance:
4 m (approximately 13 feet)
Angle:
Remote Control
40 degrees to the left and right
Information from the remote is
not received when Remote
Sensor setting is switched off.
Refer to “Switching ON/OFF
of the Remote Control” (p.
172).
of the receiver.
Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control
• The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time.
• The remote control may not operate even within the range of operation if there
is an obstacle between it and the main unit.
• Using the remote control near other equipment that uses remote control systems
may result in operational errors.
• The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use. If the
operational range of the remote control decreases, change the batteries.
• If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time, remove the
batteries.
• The remote’s response may suffer if the remote’s sensor is situated under
spotlights or exposed to other such strong lighting.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
■ About the Remote Control
Infrared Emitter
Restoring the Original
“TONE,” “HARMONY,”
and “TRANSFORM”
Settings
Adding Effects to Mic
Vocals
6
1
Selecting the Tone for
the Left-Hand and
Right-Hand Tracks
7
8
Turning the Advanced
2
3D Function or tha
surround function On
and Off
Switching the Screen of
the External Display
Selecting the Song
Genre
3
Starting and Stopping
Songs,
Selecting Previous and
Following Songs
9
Changing the Volume
10
11
Muting the Sound
4
5
Changing the Tempo of
the Song and Automatic
Accompaniment
Using the Function
Assigned to the
Buttons
Transposing Sounds
from the Keyboard and
Songs Being Played
Back
12
You can also switch the functions for the [
] (Play/Stop) button, the [FUNC 1]
[FUNC 2] button, the TEMPO [-] [+] button, and the TRANSPOSE [-] [+] button.
Please refer to “Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s Buttons” (p. 172).
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Button
Explanation
This changes the vocals from the mic. The setting switches each time you press the
button, cycling through male, female, Kids, and normal voice settings.
TRANSFORM
1
This adds harmonies to the mic vocals.
HARMONY
The harmony setting switches each time you press the button, cycling through
Music Files (p. 52), Oct-Up (p. 49), Oct-Down (p. 49), and normal voice settings.
This adds greater breadth to the sound.
2
3
3D
Pressing this button toggles the Surround effect and the Advanced 3D effect on and
off.
INTERNAL
This switches the genres of the internal songs.
Selects songs in the “Favorites.”
FAVORITES
When you press the button with external memory or a disk connected or CD, the
connected storage media is selected.
EXTERNAL
MUTE
4
5
This mutes all of the sounds.
You can use the function assigned to this button. You can also change the function
assigned to the button (p. 172).
FUNC1, FUNC2
The settings for the [TONE] button, [HARMONY] button, and [TRANSFORM]
button are restored to their original values.
The left and right tracks switch to a piano tone.
6
7
CANCEL
TONE
Pressing the button successively changes tone of the Lower track, Upper track, and
User track.
Each press of the button takes you to the next selection among the available choices,
which are, in order: panel, notations, notations+keyboard, lyrics, slide show.
You can press the [DISPLAY] button while the Tempo screen or Volume screen is
displayed to clear the Tempo screen or Volume screen.
8
DISPLAY
* Some songs may not feature screens with lyrics.
Pressing the [
Pressing the [
] button at the beginning of the song selects the previous song.
] button at a point other than the beginning of the song returns
you to the beginning of the song.
This starts and stops playback of the song.
9
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 172).
] button.
When you press the [
] button, the next song is selected.
VOL - +
(Volume)
10
11
12
You can adjust the volume.
This adjusts the tempo.
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 172).
TEMPO - +
This transposing sounds from the keyboard and songs being played back.
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 172).
TRANSPOSE - +
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
With the KR, you can enjoy practice using a variety of functions.
Displaying the Notation
Using “Visual Lesson,” you
can select practice songs suited
to your skill level.
Additionally, you can have the
results your performance
indicated in points and check
the content in the notation.
Refer to the Quick Start.
The KR can display notations not only for the internal songs, but for music files and
performances recorded with the KR. This is very convenient for performing while
reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you play
Selecting the song
When playing back songs on external memories, first connect the external memory
to the external memory port.
1.
2.
Press the [Song] button to select a song.
In some internal songs, the
fingering is displayed.
For details refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 75).
The fingering numbers shown
in the screen indicate one
possible fingering.
Press the [DigiScore] button.
The “Notation screen” appears.
fig.d-notation.eps_60
Chord names can be displayed
in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
using the KR’s Chord
Sequencer (p. 143).
You can make more advanced
settings for the notation by
pressing the [Option] button.
3.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Playback of the song begins, and the notation advances along with the progression
of the performance.
NOTE
No notes are shown in the
notation if the selected part
contains no data. To change
the part being displayed, refer
to “Making Detailed Settings
for the Notation Display” (p.
89).
Notes Regarding the Notation Display
• Since the displayed notation data is read from external memory or the internal
memory, some time may be required for the notation to be displayed.
• The displayed notations are based on music files. Priority is placed on the
readability of the displayed music, not on the accurate rendition of difficult,
high-level performances. Thus, there may be discrepancies seen when compared
with commercially available printed music. The display is not intended for
viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed notations, or complex
songs.
NOTE
• On the notation display screen, lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range
displayed on the screen and may not be visible.
You cannot display the
notation for audio files nor
audio CD’s song.
• Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the notation or
change the displayed part during playback of the song.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
■ Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds
(Touch the Notes)
In the Notation screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the
screen.
When you display the keyboard in the screen (p. 90), the keys on the keyboard for
the notes you touch are then shown in the display. This allows you confirm notes by
sight, sound, and touch.
In addition, when you trace part of the notation with your finger, the traced segment
is played back. This allows you to easily play back phrases you like.
fig.d-notation-key.eps_60
■ Scrolling the Notation Along with the
Performances (AutoSync DigiScore)
You can have the notation displayed in the screen scroll automatically as you play,
even when the song is not being played back. No more frantically trying to turn to
the next page in the notation while you are performing.
This also lets you play difficult passages more slowly and otherwise practice at your
own pace.
* Auto Sync DigiScore is linked to the performance of the part shown in the screen. The
notation does not scroll if you are playing a part that is not currently displayed.
When the Bouncing Ball is Blue
Start playing at the point where the ball is bouncing.
You can change the AutoSync
DigiScore settings. Refer to p.
90.
The bouncing ball follows along and the notation scrolls as you play.
When the Bouncing Ball is Red.
If nothing is played for a short while, the bouncing ball turns red. At this time, if you
play a phrase near the position of the bouncing ball, the ball automatically moves to
the point in the notation where you are playing.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
When you play four or more notes while the bouncing ball is red, the ball moves to
the point where you are playing.
When you play fewer than four notes, the bouncing ball does not jump to the new
position, and the notation does not scroll.
Under certain conditions, the
bouncing ball may not move as
expected.
The bouncing ball will move within the range of the notation displayed on the
external display or television. If you start playing at a point that is not currently
shown in the external display or television, the bouncing ball does not jump to the
new position, and the notation does not scroll.
■ Making Detailed Settings for the Notation
Display
You can change the part appearing on the notation display and change the manner
in which the notation is displayed.
NOTE
You can change the parts to be
displayed when you touch
each of the icons (p. 91).
1.
2.
Press the [DigiScore] button to display the Notation screen.
Press the [Option] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-notationopt.eps_60
In some internal songs, the
fingering is displayed.
The fingering numbers shown
in the screen indicate one
possible fingering.
Switch the screens
You can select the parts to be displayed in the notation by touching the four icons at
the lower left of the screen.
Icon
Description
The upper part and lower part are displayed.
The upper part is displayed.
The lower part is displayed.
The User part is displayed.
Chord names can be displayed
in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
using the KR’s Chord
Sequencer (p. 144).
You can also touch <Export> to save the notation as an image file (p. 92).
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
3.
Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Notation screen.
Item Setting
Zoom
On
Off
On
Off
Displays an enlarged notation.
Displays the notation at the normal size.
Displayed.
Sets whether or not the
enlarged notation is
displayed.
Keyboard
Sets whether the
keyboard is displayed
beneath the notation.
Not displayed.
The notation screen does not scroll
automatically.
Off
The notation screen scrolls
automatically. When the bouncing ball
is blue, playback begins from the point
in the notation where the ball is set.
When the bouncing ball is red, and you
start playing a phrase at a point in the
notation close to where the ball is
located, the ball moves to the point
where you are playing. This position is
determined after you play at least four
notes of the phrase.
AutoSync DigiScore
Sets the function
whereby the notation
screen scrolls
automatically as you
play, even if the song is
not played back.
Jump
The notation screen scrolls
Next Note
On
automatically from the current position
in the song as you play.
Lyrics
The lyrics are displayed.
This setting determines
whether or not lyrics in
songs that contain lyrics
data appear in the
notation.
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Not displayed.
Finger Numbers
This setting determines
whether or not the
fingering in songs that
contain fingering data
appears in the notation.
The fingering is displayed.
Not displayed.
Chords
The chord names are displayed.
Not displayed.
This setting determines
whether or not chord
names in songs that
contain chord data
appears in the notation.
Off
Not displayed.
Pitches
C, D, E
The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed.
Sets whether or not the
note names appear in the
music when the notation
is expanded.
Do, Re, Mi
(Fixed)
The pitch names (fixed Do) are
displayed.
Do, Re, Mi
(Movable)
The syllable names (movable Do) are
displayed.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Item
Setting
Basic
Controls each of the pedal movements.
You can start and stop playback of song
data with the left pedal. Pressing the
pedal in rapid succession moves you
back in the song the number of
measures equal to the number of times
you press the pedal, after which
Replay
playback resumes. This allows you to
use the pedal to rewind quickly, a useful
feature when, for example, you want to
repeatedly listen to a difficult phrase.
Pedal
Sets the pedal function.
Scrolls the notation in the KR’s display.
Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the
next page.
Page1
Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the
previous page.
Scrolls the notation in the external
display.
Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the
next page.
Page2
Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the
previous page.
Notes down to sixteenth notes are
indicated.
Resolution
16th note
Sets the minimum note
length indicated in the
notation.
Notes down to thirty-second notes are
indicated.
32nd note
Auto
Display is switched automatically.
Clef L
Determines whether a
treble or bass clef is
shown in the notation for
the lower part.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the
notation.
G Clef
F Clef
Auto
F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
Display is switched automatically.
Clef R
Determines whether
treble or bass clef is
shown in the notation for
the upper part.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the
notation.
G Clef
F Clef
Auto
F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
Key is switched automatically.
Key
Notation is displayed in
the
specified key.
# x 6 – 0 –
b x 5
Notation is displayed in the specified
key.
Item
Setting
User Part
User Track,
Parts 1–16
Selects the part to display when “User” is selected as the part
to be displayed.
Lower Part
Lower Track,
Parts 1–16
Selects the part to display when “Lower” is selected as the
part to be displayed.
Upper Part
Upper Track,
Part 1–16
Selects the part to display when “Upper” is selected as the
part to be displayed.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Item
Setting
Bouncing Ball
On
Off
Displayed.
This setting determines whether or not the
animated ball is shown bouncing in time with the
song as it is played back.
Not displayed.
The note is
displayed in color.
Color Notation
This settings determines whether or not the note in
the current position is colored.
On
Off
Not displayed.
You can take notations that are displayed on the KR and save them to external
memories. You can also use saved image data to your computer.
NOTE
Other than for your own
personal enjoyment, use of the
notations that are output
without the permission of the
copyright holder is prohibited
by law.
1.
2.
3.
Insert the external memory onto which you want to save the image data
in the KR’s external memory port.
Record the performance (p. 105).
Alternatively, press the [Song] button to select a song.
Press the [DigiScore] button.
The Notation screen appears.
4.
5.
Press the [Option] button.
Touch <Export>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-notationbmp.eps_60
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
6.
7.
Touch the respective parameter and set the range of image data and other
settings with the dial.
Item
Setting
Description
Start
measure
Selects the measure at which output
begins.
1, 2–
Selects the measure at which output
ends.
End Measure
Direction
Media
– song end
Portrait,
Sets the orientation of the notation
being output.
Landscape
External Memory,
Disk
Selects the media for the save
destination.
Touch <Execute>.
NOTE
The notation is saved to the external memory as image data in BMP (bitmap) format.
Do not remove the external
memory while “save” is in
progress.
* You cannot save copyrighted song data.
* Other than for your own personal enjoyment, use of the notations that are output without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.
Saving Your Visual Lesson Performance Results
When you practice with Visual Lesson, the notation showing the model performance
appears in the screen above the notation for your own performance. You can save
these notation in BMP (bitmap) format.
1. While in the “performance results confirmation screen” in Visual
Lesson, press the [Option] button.
2. Touch the parameter whose setting you want to change.
3. Set the value with the dial.
4. Touch <Execute>.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Adjusting the Tempo
This changes the song and Music Style tempos.
If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first
practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after becoming more familiar with the
song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo.
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the
tempo even when the song is in progress.
fig.panel3-2
Adjusting the Tempo with the Tempo [-] [+] Buttons
Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the
button makes the tempo increase continuously.
NOTE
Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the
button makes the tempo decrease continuously.
You can not adjust the audio
files’ tempo and audio CDs’
tempo.
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song
to the basic tempo.
■ Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time
(Tap Tempo)
You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad. This feature is called
“Tap Tempo.” By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you
are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms.
fig.panel3-3
Assigning Functions to the Performance Pads
1.
Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
fig.d-usrfunc.eps_60
Tempo function to the pedal,
and use the pedal to specify
the tempo. For details, refer to
“Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 167).
2.
3.
Touch
for the Performance Pad to which the function is
assigned, then select “Tap Tempo.”
Press the [Exit] button; the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the
screen.
giving the count through the
microphone. For more detailed
information, refer to “Enabling
the Start of Songs and
Specifying the Tempo
Press the Pad to which “Tap Tempo” is assigned at least twice.
4.
The tempo is set to the song you used when tapping the button.
Automatic Accompaniment
with the Sound of Your Voice
(Vocal Count In)” (p. 50).
■ Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute)
If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo.
Overriding tempo changes is called “Tempo Muting.”
1.
Hold down the [
[+] buttons.
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.
fig.d-tempmute.eps_60
When you play back the song, it will play at a constant tempo.
Cancel the Tempo Mute Setting
1.
Hold down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
[+] buttons.
Tempo muting is canceled.
Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Match the Tempo Before You Begin
Playing (Count In)
When you’re playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start
playing by adding a count-in.
This audible count before the song playback is called a “Count In.”
fig.panel3-3
1.
2.
Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Count screen” appears.
fig.d-cntin.eps_60
You can have a count sound be
played before the song starts
playing back by holding down
the [
(Reset)] button while
(Play/
you press the [
stop)] button.The status of the
Count settings won’t be
affected by your use of this
procedure.
Touch <Count Mode>
Down.”
to set this to “Count In” or “Count In/
With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts.
Cancelling the Count In
For more about other settings
on the Count settings screen,
refer to “Changing the Settings
for the Count” (p. 164).
1.
Press the [Count/Marker] button so its indicator is turned off.
By pressing [Exit] instead of the [Count/Mark] button, you can close the Count
settings screen without cancelling the count.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Muting Some Parts Before Playing
(Track Buttons)
For more on music files, refer
to “Music Files That the KR
Can Use” (p. 217).
With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can
be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice hands separately. For
example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same
right-hand part be played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand
part plays.
A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below.
fig.trackbuttons.e
NOTE
You cannot mute individual
parts separately in audio files
and audio CDs.
Accom-
paniment
Drums/SFX
Part
Part
If a single Track button
includes more than one
instrument and you want to
mute just one of those
instruments, take a look at
“Modifying the Settings of
Each Part” (p. 137).
By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is
referred to as “muting.”
By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion, you can
mute parts the same way. For details, refer to “Recording While Selecting the Track
Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 110).
1.
Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 75).
When a single Part is not
played, it is called “Minus
One.” Using Minus One, you
can mute out a particular
instrument and play the part
yourself.
Selecting the Part that You’ll be Playing
2.
Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button’s indicator light or
flash go dark.
The sound for the selected part no longer plays.
For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [4/Upper] button.
When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound. Practice
your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback.
When playing back SMF files
instruments, and the [3/
Playing Back a Song
Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
button do not correctly control
the lower/ upper
performances, please change
the “Track Assign” settings.
Please refer to “Changing the
Parts Assigned to the Track
(Track Assign)” (p. 183).
3.
The song will begin playing back.
The part you selected in step 2 will not sound.
Once again press the button you selected in step 2. The button’s indicator will light
up, and the part will be heard once again.
Even while the song is playing, you can press the track buttons to mute or un-mute
the sound.
Stopping the Song
You can adjust the balance
between the keyboard and
song volume levels. Check out
“Adjusting the Volume
Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 73).
4.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The song will stop.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Setting Markers for Repeated Practice
(Marker)
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can
then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures.
NOTE
■ Placing a Marker within a Song
You cannot place markers in
audio files and in audio CDs.
markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of
a section of music. Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same
place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a marker even
while playback is in progress.
Access the Marker Screen
First, select the song in which you’ll set the markers (p. 75).
1.
2.
Press the [Count/Marker] button.
Touch <Marker>.
The Marker screen appears.
fig.d-marker.eps_60
Placing Markers
3.
4.
Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [
and [ (Fwd)] buttons.
(Bwd)]
Touch <- - -> for Marker A.
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.
“- - -” on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the
marker.
Markers can also be assigned
in units of beats rather than
measures. Refer to “Placing a
Marker in the Middle of a
Measure” (p. 164).
5.
In the same way, touch the Marker B <- - -> to set Marker B.
It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A.
■ Playback from a Marker Location
1.
At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want
to go to.
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set.
When you play the song, playback starts from the position of the marker.
With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker
B on the Marker screen.
■ Erasing a Marker
1.
Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase.
fig.d-markclear.eps_60
The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <- - ->.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
■ Moving a Marker
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section
of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back, without changing the number
of measures of marked.
1.
On the Marker screen, touch
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
or
for the marker to be moved.
When you touch
When you touch
, the marker is moved to a previous part of the song.
, the marker is moved to a later part of the song.
Moving Markers A and B without Changing the Interval Between Them
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
1.
On the Marker screen, touch
or
in the middle of the screen.
For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and
Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure, when you touch in the
middle of the screen, Marker A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and
Marker B is moved to the beginning of the fifth measure.
Touch
to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B
to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.
fig.markerA-B.e
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
16
16
Measure
Marker A
Measure
Marker B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Marker A
Marker B
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
■ Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over
You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you
want to focus on a passage.
1.
2.
First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to
repeat.
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through
eighth measures over and over. You should place Marker A at the beginning of the
fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar.
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen.
fig.d-markrpt.eps_60
ON
OFF
When <Repeat> is On
• If neither Marker A nor
Marker B is set, the song
is played back from the
beginning to the end.
• If you only place marker
A, playback repeats
from marker A to the
end of the song.
The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B.
When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly.
• If you only place marker
B, playback repeats from
the beginning of the
Cancelling Repeat Playback
song to marker B.
3.
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen, and the icon returns to the
original color.
Repeat playback is cancelled.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and
Songs Played Back (Transpose)
By using the “Transpose function,” you can transpose your performance without
changing the notes you play. For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with
many sharps ( ) or flats ( ), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to
read and play.
NOTE
You cannot transpose audio
files and audio CDs.
You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key.
When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is
comfortable for the singer, while still playing the notes as written (i.e., with the same
fingering positions).
fig.panel3-4
First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed (p. 75).
1.
2.
Press the [Transpose] button.
A “Transpose screen” like the one below appears.
fig.d-transpose.eps_60
Touch one of the three icons to select the song or sounds to be
transposed.
Icon
Target
Settings Value
Keyboard sound
-6–0–5
Song to be played back
-24–0–24
-6–0–5
Keyboard sounds, songs being played back
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
3.
Touch the screen keyboard or
value.
,
to select the transposition
Each time you press
When you touch
or
, it transposes the key by a semitone.
, a value of “0” is set.
You can also use the dial to change the transposition value.
When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] button’s indicator
lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the song, the notes are transposed.
When you press the [Exit] button, the transposition remains in effect, and you’re
returned to the previous screen.
Cancelling Transposition
4.
Press the [Transpose] button and the indicator light goes out.
The transposition value reverts
to “0” when you turn off the
power or select another song.
Transposition is cancelled.
The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music
is transposed by the value set here.
Example: Playing a song in E major while playing the keys
for C major
In this example, C is the root note in the key of C major. E, the root of E major, is the
third in C major. It is up four keys, including the black keys, so touch
enter “4” for the setting.
, then
fig.trans.e
If you play C E G
It will sound E G# B
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing, or to add
NOTE
additional parts.
Recorded performances are
discarded when another song
is selected, or when the power
is turned off. Be sure to save
external memory (p. 116) or
register the song to the
• Recording just your own keyboard performance
• Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment
→ “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 107)
Favorites (p. 82).
• Recording along with the internal songs and songs on external memories
→ “Recording Along with a Song” (p. 109)
• Re-recording
NOTE
→ “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 110)
You cannot record while
playing along with audio files
and audio CDs.
❍ If the Following Screen Appears
If you’ve recorded a song or changed a song’s settings (see p. 137), the following
message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song.
NOTE
You cannot save songs to CDs,
and you cannot delete songs
recorded to CDs. Furthermore,
you cannot format CDs.
If it’s okay to delete the song, touch <OK>.
If you do not want to delete the song, touch <Cancel>, and either save the song to an
external memory (p. 116) or register the song to the Favorites (p. 82).
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording a New Song (New Song)
This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or
Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel4-1
Settings for Recording Performances
1.
2.
Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.
This sets the KR for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment.
Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 28).
Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
If you press the [
(Rec)] button when a song has already been selected, the
following message appears.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
If you select <New Song>
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed
information, refer to “If the
Following Screen Appears” (p.
104).
4.
5.
Touch <New Song>.
This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.
The KR is put in recording standby.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
Decide on the tempo and beat.
If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.
When you have finished making the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Start Recording
NOTE
been recorded is deleted when
the power to the KR is turned
off. If you do not want a
6.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you
performance deleted, then
save it to an external memory
or to Favorites. Refer to
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing rather than
pushing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [
light up.
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators
“Saving Songs” (p. 116).
Stop Recording
7.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.
Listening to the Recorded Performance
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [
NOTE
8.
(Play/Stop)] button.
When “Auto Start (p. 180)” is
set to “ON,” and no action is
taken for a certain period of
time after you have recorded a
performance, a confirmation
screen asking you if you want
to delete the song appears in
the display.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances
When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to
the track buttons as follows.
If you touch <OK>, the song is
deleted and the demo begins.
If you want to return to the
previous screen and continue
with the recorded
•
•
•
Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard)
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.
Layer performance
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.
performance, touch <Cancel>.
Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the
upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.
•
•
Layer performance and Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the
upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.
Drum set or sound effect performance
Recorded on the [R/Rhythm] button.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording With Accompaniment
Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.
Decide on the Music Style.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
You press the [
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a
song has already been recorded.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed
information, refer to “If the
Following Screen Appears” (p.
104).
4.
5.
Touch <New Song>.
This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.
The KR is put in recording standby.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
Decide on the tempo.
Start Recording
6.
Play a chord on the lower part of the keyboard.
You can change how recording
is stopped when recording a
performance with Automatic
Accompaniment. To learn
how, see “Changing How
Recording Stops” (p. 111).
An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time.
Stop Recording
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
7.
An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the
same time.
Listening to the Recorded Performance
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [
8.
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance plays back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances
Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are
assigned to the track buttons as shown below.
Music Styles are composed of
eight parts. For details, refer to
“Music Styles and Automatic
Accompaniment” (p. 57).
Track button
[R/Rhythm]
Performance Recorded
The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is
recorded here. In addition, drum sets and effect sounds
that are selected with the keys in a performance are
recorded to this track.
When using Piano Style accompaniment (p. 72), the
performance played on the keyboard is recorded here.
[1/Whole]
[2/ Bass
Accomp]
The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and
accompaniment part are recorded here.
When the KR is set so that sounds from performances on
the left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the
Automatic Accompaniment sounds (p. 71), your own
performance on the left-hand side of the keyboard is
recorded here.
[3/Lower]
[4/Upper]
Your own performance on the right-hand side of the
keyboard is recorded here.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording Along with a Song
Try recording along with internal songs and songs on external memories.
Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1.
Select a song.
For more on how to select songs, refer to p. 75.
2.
3.
Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.
Press the [DigiScore] button to display the notation.
For instructions on displaying the notation, refer to p. 87.
The song tempo is stored
within the song you selected.
Recording Settings
4.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
5.
Touch <Add On>.
With this setting, you can record while listening to the selected song.
Selecting the Track to Record
6.
Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track
that you want to play yourself).
NOTE
The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the KR enters recording-
standby mode.
Only drum sets or SFX set are
recorded to the [R/Rhythm]
button.
Since in this example we will record the upper part performance, press the [4/
Upper] button to make the button’s indicator light blink.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
Start Recording
Press the [
7.
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing the
keyboard instead of pushing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
(Play/Stop)] and [ (Rec)] buttons’ indicators light.
When recording starts, the [
Stop Recording
Press the [
8.
(Play/Stop)] button.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording stops.
Listening to the Recorded Performance
9.
Press the [
(Reset)] button, then press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
Recording While Selecting the Track
Buttons (Redoing Recordings)
When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want
to re-record, and then record again.
When you want to record over
again after deleting all of the
previous recording, refer to
“Erasing Recorded
When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from
the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will
be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance.
Performances” (p. 111).
1.
2.
Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to go to the measure
where you want to begin recording.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
within the song you selected. If
you want to change the tempo
of the recorded song, refer to
“Changing the Tempo of
Recorded Songs” (p. 151) and
“Changing the Tempo Within
the Song” (p. 151).
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
3.
4.
Touch <Add on>.
Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record.
The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.
The [
(Play/Stop)] button’s indicator flashes, and the KR is put in recording
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
5.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.
Rerecording the Accompaniment Part of Automatic Accompaniment
When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, set Sync Start (p.
65), then specify a chord or press the [Start/Stop] button.
6.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop recording.
If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the
[Intro/Ending] button.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Erasing Recorded Performances
You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance.
1.
Hold down the [Song] button and press the [
(Rec)] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-songdel.eps_60
2.
Touch <OK>.
This deletes the recorded song.
When you touch <Cancel>, the song selection screen or basic screen appears and the
recorded song is not erased.
■ Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks
You can select and erase performances on specific tracks.
1.
Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance
you want to erase, then press the [ (Rec)] button.
The Track button’s light goes dark, and the recorded music is erased.
Changing How Recording Stops
When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the
accompaniment and the way recording mode stops.
1.
2.
Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen appears.
Touch <Rec Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-recmode.eps_60
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
3.
Touch <Rec Stop>
“Composer Stop.”
to switch between “Arranger Stop” and
Display
Explanation
Recording stops at the same time the Automatic
Accompaniment stops.
Arranger Stop
Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic
Composer Stop
Accompaniment stops. When you press the [
Stop)] button, recording stops.
(Play/
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups
You can record songs that start with pickup beats (songs that start on a beat other
than the measure’s first beat).
fig.PU.e
Count Sound
~
Measure
-2
PU
1
Recording begins here
Carry out Steps 1–4 on p. 105 to prepare for recording.
If the [ (Rec)] button’s indicator is not lit, press the [
(Rec)] button so the
indicator is lit.
The KR is put in recording standby.
1.
Press the [
(Bwd)] button one time.
The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to “PU,” and the
KR is set to record a song starting with a pickup.
fig.d-pu.eps_60
Start recording. After a one-measure count, recording begins.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Using External Memories
If you install separately available external memory or a floppy disk drive, you’ll be
If connecting an optional
floppy disk drive, substitute
“floppy disk” wherever the
term “external memory”
appears here.
able to save songs you’ve recorded and listen to commercially available music data.
■ Connecting and Ejecting an External Memory
1.
Press the External Memory port cover and open the cover.
Press the cover in; the cover will open.
NOTE
Use external memory available
from Roland. Proper
functioning cannot be
guaranteed if other external
memory products are used.
2.
3.
Connect the external memory to the External Memory port.
NOTE
Carefully insert the an external
memory all the way in—until
it is firmly in place.
931
Press the cover in again to close the cover.
* Always keep the Ext Memory port cover closed except when connecting and
disconnecting external memory.
Locking the External Memory Port Cover
When connecting external memory (sold separately), you can lock the memory port
cover to prevent theft of the connected external memory.
1.
2.
3.
Connect the external memory to the external memory port.
Press the External Memory port cover to close the cover.
NOTE
Secure the lock using the anti-theft lock screws included with the
instrument.
Take care not to lose the anti-
theft lock screws. Also be sure
to use only the included
screws to secure the anti-theft
lock.
s
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
■ Formatting Media (Format)
The process of preparing external memory or disks so that they can be used with the
KR is called “initialization” (formatting).
In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific
type of device. If the media format does not match the KR’s, you will not be able to
use that media with the KR.
fig.panel4-3
1.
2.
3.
Connect the external memory to the external memory port.
Press the [Song/File] button.
NOTE
When an external memory is
initialized, all of the data
saved on the external
memory is erased. If you’re
formatting a used external
memory for reuse, be sure to
check first to make sure the
external memory doesn’t
contain any data you don’t
want to lose.
Touch <File>.
A “File screen” like the one below appears.
fig.d-songfile.eps_60
NOTE
When initializing floppy disks,
check to make sure that the
disk’s write protect tab is slid
to the “write” position(p. 7).
4.
Touch <Format Media>.
The following screen appears.
fig.d-format.eps_60
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
NOTE
5.
6.
Touch <Media>
to select the storage media to be initialized.
Do not remove the storage
media until the initialization is
completed.
Touch <Execute>.
A confirmation screen appears. If you want to quit the initialization, touch <Cancel>.
NOTE
Do not eject the floppy disk
while data is being read from
or written to the disk. This
may scratch the disk’s
7.
Touch <OK>.
Initialization of the external memory begins.
When initialization is completed, you’re returned to the previous screen.
magnetic surface, rendering
the memory unusable. (The
disk drive’s indicator lights
brightly while data is being
read from or written to the
disk. At all other times, the
indicator is lit more dimly, or
is not lit at all.)
NOTE
If “Error” appears on screen,
take a look at “Error
Messages” (p. 201).
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Saving Songs
Substitute the words “floppy
disk” for “external memory” if
using a separately purchased
floppy disk drive.
another song. Storing recorded performances and other data to external memories
or the Favorites is called “saving.” Be sure to save important songs to external
memories or Favorites.
What are “Favorites?”
You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to
“Favorites,” allowing you to select these songs easily (p. 82).
When you register a song on an external memory to Favorites, you can then play
back the song without connecting the external memory to the external memory
connector.
When using a new storage
media, first initialize (format)
the external memory on the
KR. Take a look at “Formatting
Media (Format)” (p. 114).
If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites, the performance won’t be erased
when the power is turned off.
NOTE
Some commercially available
music files cannot be saved
because they are copy
protected.
Preparations for Saving Data
When saving to external memories, connect the external memory to the external
memory port.
1.
2.
Press the [Song/File] button.
Touch <File>.
When saving to floppy disks,
first check to make sure that
the floppy disk’s protect tab is
set to the “Write” position
(p. 7).
The “Song File screen” appears.
3.
Touch <Save>.
The following “Save Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songsave.eps_60
If not handled with care, a
floppy disk and an external
memory can be damaged, or
the data on it become
corrupted, making playback
impossible. We recommend
saving your songs on two
different media.
When you want to clear all of
the content saved to the
“Favorites” and restore the
settings to the original factory
condition on the KR, refer to
“Formatting the User
Memory” (p. 180).
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Determining the Name of the Song to be Saved
4.
Touch <Rename>.
The following “Rename screen” appears.
fig.d-songname.eps_60
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input, the character appears
at the cursor location. For example touching <ABC> in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through “English (upper case),”
“English (lower case),” “numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position.
5.
When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit] button.
Determining the Save Destination
6.
7.
Touch <Media>
to select the save-destination storage media.
Touch <File>
to select the save-destination song number.
If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new
song, the previously saved song will be erased. If you do not want to lose a saved
song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.
Selecting the Save Setting (when saving to external memories)
8.
9.
Press the [Option] button.
Touch “Tone Compatibility”
format.
to select the tone compatibility
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Some Tones are unique to the KR. Data that is recorded using these tones may not
play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players. When you want
to save data so that it can be played back on another devices, save the data with
“MT” set as the Tone compatibility format.
Display
Explanation
The song is saved as data capable of reproducing
performances with richness of expression using this unit’s
special Tones.
KR
Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland
Digital Pianos or Music Players other than this unit.
You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-
G/R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT
series devices.
MT
<Note>
When data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this
instrument, some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the
data was recorded may be altered.
Even with data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format, an exact
reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS
devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players.
Selecting the File Format (when saving to external memories)
NOTE
Depending on the playback
instrument, some notes may
drop out or sound different.
10.Touch <File Format>
to select the file format.
Display
Explanation
Saves the song as an SMF (Standard MIDI Files). Songs saved
in this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments
that can play SMF music files (p. 217).
A song recorded using commercial music files can’t be saved
in “Save As SMF” format for reasons of copyright protection.
SMF
NOTE
Never turn off the power
while the saving operation is
in progress. Doing so will
damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
Saves the song in this unit’s format. You can listen to songs
saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/R series and KR
series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices. This
format is called “i-format”.
i-format
11.Press the [Exit] button.
It’s a good idea to get into the
habit of moving the write-
protect tab on the floppy disk
to the “Protect” position when
you’ve finished saving your
data. Keeping the tab at
Save
12.Touch <Execute> to start saving.
The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more.
Don’t take the external memory out of the external memory port until the saving
process is finished.
“Protect” prevents operations
that could erase your songs by
mistake.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Deleting Saved Songs
This deletes songs that have been saved on external memories, or to Favorites.
To delete a song on an external memory, first connect the external memory to the
external memory port.
1.
2.
Press the [Song/File] button.
Touch <File>.
The “Song File screen” appears.
3.
Touch <Delete>.
A “Delete Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songdel.eps_60
4.
Touch <Media>
Touch <File>
to select the storage media.
5.
6.
to select the song to be deleted.
NOTE
Touch <Execute>.
Never turn off the power
while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will
damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
The selected song is deleted.
Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the operation
is finished.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Copying Songs on External Memories
to Favorites
You can take songs saved on external memories and copy them to Favorites.
You can also copy songs in Favorites to external memories.
1.
Connect the external memory with the song to be copied to the external
memory port.
2.
3.
Press the [Song/File] button.
Touch <File>.
The “Song File screen” appears.
4.
Touch <Copy>.
The following “Copy Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songcopy.eps_60
Specifying the Copy Source
5.
6.
Touch the <Media>
to select the copy source storage media.
to select the song you want to copy.
Touch the <File>
When “Copy All” is selected, songs within the selected folder on the external
memory are copied to Favorites.
Specifying the Copy Destination
7.
Touch <Favorites>
song.
to select the copy destination for the
If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that
location, the previously saved song will be erased. If you don’t want to erase a
previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the
destination column.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
NOTE
8.
Touch <Execute>.
Never turn off the power
Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the copy is
finished.
while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will
damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
The song from the external memory is copied to Favorites.
■ Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to External
Memories
Songs that’ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto external memories.
In this case, in the “Copy Song screen” in Step 4 above, touch the arrow icon in the
center to point the arrow upwards. This sets the KR to copy the song in Favorites to
the external memory.
fig.d-songcopy2.eps_60
NOTE
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from external
memories to Favorites.
Some song data cannot copy
because they are copy
protected.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including
Moving Keys (A/V sync)
With this instrument you can create performance data that, like the CD included
with the KR, contains Moving Keys data.
By connecting a Roland CD-2 or similar recording device, you can record not just
your piano performances, you can also connect a microphone to record vocals along
with the piano performance.
Moreover, you can connect video equipment to the KR and record video images
along with the other data as well.
Recording
■ Making the Connections
fig.05-2-01
When connecting audio recording devices
KR
To simultaneously record using a mic or other
musical instrument, connect as shown below.
Jack Panel (Rear)
Jack Panel (Front)
Audio cable
LINE OUT,
LINE IN,
IN PUT
OUT PUT
Musical
Instruments,
e.t.c.
Recording device
Mic
fig.05-2-02
When connecting video recording devices
KR
To simultaneously record using a mic or other
musical instrument, connect as shown below.
NOTE
Jack Panel (Rear)
If both the output for A/V
Sync and AUX input are
connected simultaneously,
please set “Mode” of the Aux
input to “Off.”
Jack Panel (Front)
If this is set to anything other
than “Off,” make sure to
disconnect any cables
connected to Aux Out or
Balanced Out.
Audio cable
LINE OUT,
OUT PUT
Video Camera
VIDEO OUT
If such connections are left
intact, you may likely
encounter a loud, continuous
beep tone.
Musical
Instruments,
e.t.c.
LINE IN,
IN PUT
Mic
VIDEO IN
Video Equipment
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys (A/V sync)
1.
Press the [Menu] button.
The “A/V Sync” display will appear.
If the “Composer Menu” screen appears, touch
to switch the page.
2.
Touch the <A/V Sync Output>.
The following display will appear.
3.
4.
Start recording with the connected device.
Touch the <Begin Output>.
The following message appears.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys (A/V sync)
When the transmission of the initial setup ends, the following message appears.
NOTE
When you display other screen
to change tones etc. while
5.
When the “Start performance” message appears, start playing the KR.
outputting data, press [Menu]
button once again to display
the “A/V Sync” screen, then
touch the <A/V Sync Output>.
6.
7.
When you have finished the performance, touch <Stop Output.>
Stop recording with the connected device.
When you touch the <Stop Output>, a screen like the one shown below appears.
Press the [Exit] button to exit the A/V sync function.
When you record other song, touch the <Begin Next Recording>, then repeat the
procedure from Step 3.
When you hear the performance recorded to the connected equipment, touch the
<Listen to This Recording>.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys (A/V sync)
A screen like the one shown below appears.
When you touch the <Set Aux Input for Playback>, the screen to change the setting
is displayed.
NOTE
Playing back CDs to which this
performance data is recorded
on CD players other than the
KR’s internal CD player may
result in damage to the
speakers. To listen to these
CDs, either play them back on
the KR’s internal CD player or
connect to the KR in
accordance with the
Change the setting and the connections.
instructions in “Playback (Aux
Input)” (p. 127).
Refer to “Making Advanced A/V Sync Input Settings” (p. 128).
Note
With certain Surround settings, data may not be output from the KR as you intend.
Turn Surround off when using the A/V sync function. Alternatively, you can switch
Surround on and turn on all parts other than the keyboard with the part On/Off
settings.
fig.d-adv3d.eps_60
ON
OFF
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys (A/V sync)
■ Making Advanced A/V Sync Output Settings
1.
2.
Press the [Menu] button.
The “A/V Sync” display will appear.
If the “Composer Menu” screen appears, touch
to switch the page.
Touch the <A/V Sync Output>.
The following display will appear.
3.
4.
Press the [Option] button.
The following display will appear.
Touch the <Output Mode>
to select output connectors.
When the sound has been distorted, touch the <Level>
volume.
to adjust the
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Output Mode
Balanced Out, AUX Out Output connectors
Audio level other than keyboard
performance data
Level
0–127
You can confirm the settings by touching “Audition.”
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys (A/V sync)
Playback (Aux Input)
■ Making the Connections
fig.05-2-03
When connecting audio recording devices
Jack Panel (Front)
KR
LINE OUT,
OUT PUT
Audio cable
Recording device
fig.05-2-04
When connecting video recording devices
NOTE
Jack Panel (Front)
KR
If both the output for A/V
Sync and AUX input are
connected simultaneously,
please set “Mode” of the Aux
input to “Off.”
If this is set to anything other
than “Off,” make sure to
disconnect any cables
connected to Aux Out or
Balanced Out.
Audio cable
LINE OUT,
OUT PUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
OUT
If such connections are left
intact, you may likely
encounter a loud, continuous
beep tone.
Television, Projector
Video Equipment
1.
2.
Press the [Menu] button.
The “A/V Sync” display will appear.
Touch
to switch the page, then touch the <Aux Input>.
The following display will appear.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys (A/V sync)
NOTE
3.
Touch the <Mode>
to select “A/V sync.”
When “A/V Sync” is selected,
the KR automatically
When you display the “Song selection screen” after you set “A/V Sync” for the
<Mode> setting, and the song category automatically changes to “Aux Input
Decode.”
distinguishes the type of the
encoded signal, then starts
playing. In some cases,
however, it doesn’t play
correctly.
4.
Play back the performance on the connected device.
In such cases, press <Reset>. If
playback still doesn’t occur
correctly, set “Mode” to either
“A/V Sync Type A” or “A/V
Sync Type B.”
■ Making Advanced A/V Sync Input Settings
1.
Press the [Menu] button.
The “A/V Sync” display will appear.
The <Reset> icon is also
displayed when you select
“Aux Input Decode” as the
category in the song selection
screen.
If the “Composer Menu” screen appears, touch
to switch the page.
2.
Press the [Option] button.
The following display will appear.
3.
Touch the slider or
to set for the parameter.
Parameter Setting
Explanation
On rare occasions, the keyboard performance and
accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized
properly.
In such instances, you can adjust the timing of the
keyboard performance sounds so that they are in time
with the accompaniment.
Sync
Level
0–100
0–127
If the level is set to “0,” only
the keyboard performance
sound from the device
Audio level other than keyboard performance data
connected to the Aux Input
jacks will be heard.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 User Program Registration
You can register the currently selected tones, transposition and volume balance, and a variety of other settings
as “favorite performance settings” (User Program). This allows you to call up the registered favorite
performance settings whenever you need them. Registering the settings you often use is makes it even more
convenient for you.
For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to “Parameters Stored to Internal Memory” (p. 216).
Panel Settings
1
User Program
Write
Temporary Memory
KR User Memory
1
7
2
8
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Save
Load
9 10 11 12
7
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36
.....
36 User Programs
(1 User Program Set)
External Memory
1
2
3
4
5
6
Save
Load
7
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36
.....
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 User Program Registration
Giving a name to a set of User Programs
4. Touch <Rename>.
Saving Performance Settings
(User Program)
A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
Any collection of settings, including those describing the
current status of your data selections or settings Automatic
Accompaniment, can be saved to the [User Program] button.
You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User
Program] button. Saving your preferred combinations of
Music Styles and Tones, as well as other frequently used
settings, makes it more convenient.
fig.d-upgname.eps_50
You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR.
fig.panel_UPG
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears of the cursor potion.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character
group (A→B→C→A...).
→ For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to
“Parameters Stored in the User Program” (p. 216).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “ upper case,” “ lower case,” “numerals,”
“symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
1. Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the
settings are the way you want them.
2. Press the [User Program] button.
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
A “User Program screen” like the one shown below
appears.
fig.d-upg.eps_50
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button.
You’re returned to the Write User Program screen.
Determining the Write Destination
6. Touch
to select the write-destination
number.
7. Touch <Execute>.
3. Touch <Write>.
Program] button.
A “Write User Program screen” like the following
appears.
*
Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Writing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
fig.d-upgwrite.eps_50
→ You can restore the content registered to the [User Program]
button to the original factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the
Factory Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 172).
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 User Program Registration
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
Calling Up Saved User
Programs
You can easily call up settings saved to the [User Program]
button.
screen.
For further information about the content stored in the
User Programs, refer to p. 216.
1. Press the [User Program] button.
Saving the User Program
Sets
Program] button and save them as a set to an external
memory, or to user memory.
The “User Program screen” appears.
Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll
through the screen and display other name of User
Programs.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
When saving to an external memory, first connect an external
memory to the external memory port.
2. Touch the name of the User Program you want to call
up.
→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to
When you touch the name of the User Program, the
buttons or other performance settings instantly change
to the previously saved settings.
“Using External Memories” (p. 113).
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Touch <File>.
■ Changing the Way User
3. Touch <Save>.
Programs Are Called Up
A “Save User Program screen” like the following
When calling up User Programs by touching program names
in the “User Program screen,” you can select different types
of settings depending on how long you touch the touch
panel.
appears.
fig.d-upgsave.eps_50
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
A settings screen like the following appears.
fig.d-upgopt.eps_50
Giving a Name to a Set of User Programs
4. Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position. For example
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group
(A→B→C→A...).
3. Touch <Instant> or <Delayed> to select the setting.
Display
Instant
Explanation
Immediately after a User Program name is
touched, the Automatic Accompaniment
settings also switch.
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
When you continue to touch the User
Program name for a few moments, the
Automatic Accompaniment settings are
switched
Delayed
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 User Program Registration
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
■ Loading Saved User Program
Sets
5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
User Programs that have been saved on external memories or
in user memory can be called up, on an individual set basis,
to the [User Program] button.
button.
Determining the Save Destination
*
deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the
[User Program] button.
6. Touch <Media>
to select the save-
destination strage media.
When loading a set of User Programs from an external
memory, first connect the external memory to the external
memory port.
7. Touch <File>
to select the save-
destination User Program number.
→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to
If a User Program set name is displayed, a User Program
set saved to that number is already.
“Using External Memories” (p. 113).
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Touch <File>.
If you select a number with previously saved User
Program set data, then save a new set of data to that
same number, the older User Program set will be
deleted. If you don’t want to lose any previously saved
User Programs, select a number in the save-destination
column that does not yet have a name.
3. Touch <Load>.
A “Load User Program screen” like the following
appears.
fig.d-upgload.eps_50
Saving
8. Touch <Execute> to begin the save.
screen.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
→ When clearing the set of saved User Programs, refer to
Specifying the Set of User Programs to be
Loaded
“Deleting Saved User Program Sets” (p. 133).
4. Touch <
> <
> to select the storage media to be
read from.
Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll
through the screen and display other name of User
Programs.
5. Touch the name of User Program to load.
6. Touch <Execute>.
The selected User Programs are loaded to the [User
Program] button.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 User Program Registration
Copying Sets of User Programs on
External Memories to the User
Memory
Deleting Saved User
Program Sets
external memories or in user memory.
You can copy sets of User Programs saved on external
memories and to user memory.
When deleting a set of User Programs on an external
memory, first connect the external memory to the external
memory port.
You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user
memory and to external memories.
1. Connect the external memory with the settings to be
→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to
copied to the external memory port.
“Using External Memories” (p. 113).
2. Touch the [User Program] button.
3. Touch <File>.
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Touch <File>.
4. Touch <Copy>.
3. Touch <Delete>.
A “Copy User Programs screen” like the following
A “Delete User Program screen” like the following
appears.
fig.d-upgcopy.eps_50
appears.
fig.d-upgdel.eps_50
Specifying the Copy Source
4. Touch <Media>
to select the strage
5. Touch <Media>
to select the strage
media.
media.
5. Touch <File>
to select the set of User
6. Touch <File>
to select the set of User
Programs to be deleted.
Programs you want to copy.
6. Touch <Execute>.
If “All” is selected, all of the sets of User Programs on the
external memory are copied to user memory.
The selected User Programs are deleted.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
Specifying the Copy Destination
7. Touch <User>
to select the copy
destination for the set of User Programs.
If a User Program name is displayed, already a User
Program saved to that number is already.
If you select a number with User Programs data, and
then copy data to that number, the previously saved
User Programs are deleted. If you do not want to delete
the saved User Programs, select a number in the save-
destination column for which no name is displayed.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 User Program Registration
8. Touch <Execute>.
If you want to use the Load Next function to switch
among User Programs saved to external memory, make
sure to set Load Next in all of the User Program sets to
“ON.” Also, be sure to set the Pedal Shift value so it is
for the same pedal.
The set of User Programs on the external memory is
saved to user memory.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
■ Selecting the Pedal Used for
Switching Settings (Pedal Shift)
■ Coping Sets of User Programs
Stored in the User Memory to
External Memories
3. Touch <Pedal Shift>
to select the setting.
Display
Explanation
You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and
copy them to external memories.
You can use a function assigned to the
pedal.
OFF
In this case, in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4
above, touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the
arrow to point up. This sets the KR to copy the User Program
set in the user memory to the external memory.
The left pedal is dedicated to switching
User Programs.The function assigned to
the left pedal cannot be used.
Left Pedal
The center pedal is dedicated to
switching User Programs.The function
assigned to the center pedal cannot be
used.
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying
sets of User Program set from external memories to user
memory.
Center Pedal
Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
screen.
Using the Pedal to Switch
User Programs
You can assign the function of the sequential switching of the
“User Programs” to the pedal. That way, each time you
depress the pedal, the KR switches to the next User Program.
■ Sequential Loading of User
Program Sets Stored
(Load Next)
When using the pedal to switch your User Programs,
you can also call up sequential sets of User Programs as
saved to external memory. This feature is called the
“Load Next” function.
Great for use in concerts and similar situations, this allows
you to prepare and save your User Programs in the sequence
they are to be used, and then call up User Programs in the
appropriate order while you perform, simply by depressing
the pedal.
3. Touch <Load Next>
to select the setting.
Explanation
Display
1. Press the [User Program] button.
Switches Load Next off. The next press of
the pedal after the 36th User Program is
called up returns you to the first User
Program of the same User Program set.
2. Touch <Pedal> in the lower part of the screen.
A “PEDAL screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-upgopt.eps_50
OFF
ON
Switches Load Next on. The next press of
the pedal after the 36th User Program has
been called up takes you to the first User
Program in the next User Program set.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
screen.
→ The Pedal Shift and Load Next settings are stored in each User
Program set.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the [Exit] button.
Simultaneously Switching
User Program and
The User Program screen returns to the display.
Touch <Write> to save the setting to the User Program.
For more detailed information, refer to “Saving
Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 130).
Transmitting PC Numbers
You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted
to an external MIDI device when you switch the User
Program on the KR.
You can register PC number settings to each of the User
Programs, just as you can with button settings and other
settings preferences.
Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set
1. Press the [User Program] button, then touch the name
of the performance setting you want to set.
Setting the Transmission of the PC
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <
> <
> to switch the page to display
the following screen.
fig-upgPCset.eps_50
4. Touch
for the parameter and make the
settings.
Display
Description
Bank
Select MSB
Sets the Bank Select MSB.
Sets the Bank Select LSB.
Bank
Select LSB
Program
Change
Sets the Program Change messages
(Program Numbers).
This prevents the PC number from being
transmitted (Off), or sets the transmission
channel (Channel 1–16).
Tx PC
Channel
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment,
Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)
then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer
to “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 107)
Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously
Commercially Available Music Files
recorded material while continuing to add performances of
other parts.
Commercially available song file recorded in Roland’s SMF
format is also composed of sixteen parts.
The KR is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen
parts. Since each part’s performance is recorded using one
tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones
for the data in one song. The function used to layer these
sixteen parts, one at a time, is called the “16-Track
By loading the song file from the external memory and using
the 16-Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file.
→ Although with commercially available Roland SMF music
data, Part 11 is included in the [2/Bass Accomp] track button,
other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons.
Sequencer.”
fig.16track.e
*
With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit
the data.
16-Track Sequencer
You can record performances for up to 16 parts,
overlaying them part by part, to create a single song.
■ The 16-Track Sequencer Screen
Part 1
Flute Part
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-
track Sequencer screen.
Bass Part
Piano Part (left hand)
Piano Part (right hand)
1. Press the [Menu] button.
•
•
•
Part 16
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
fig.d-16tr.eps_50
16-Track Sequencer and Track Buttons
In addition to the “16-Track Sequencer” function, the “Track
Buttons” (p. 97) are another of the unit’s playing/recording
functions.
These five “Track buttons” are used for organizing the 16-
Track Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This allows you to use the
16-Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances
recorded with the Track buttons, and make even more
detailed edits of the songs.
You can easily play back the original song data with the 16-
Track Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons,
and more.
You cannot use the Track buttons while the “16-Track
Sequencer screen” is displayed.
The Track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as
shown below.
Track button
[R/Rhythm]
Part
D (10), S (11)
[1/Whole]
1
[2/Bass Accomp]
[3/Lower]
2, 5–9, 12–16
3
4
[4/Upper]
Since the 16-Track Sequencer records one tone to one part,
you cannot use Layer performance (p. 31), Split performance
(p. 32), or other such functions to record two or more tones
simultaneously. Also, you can’t record the performance with
Automatic Accompaniment.
2. Touch
to switch the page, then touch
<16trk Sequencer>.
A “16-track Sequencer screen” like the one shown below
appears.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
fig.d-16tr.eps_50
Display
Solo
Function
Only the selected Part is played back.
Toggles playback of the selected Part to on
or off.
Mute
Clear
The performance data for the selected part is
deleted.
*
When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the
deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If
you don’t want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>.
Once a performance has been erased, it can’t be restored.
Icon
Explanation
*
You cannot touch <Clear> during playback of the song.
Touch to select the part to be recorded, or the
<1>–<16> part whose settings are to be changed. The
3. Touch <Part> to make more detailed settings for the
button for the selected part changes color.
selected part.
This Part to be played back
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-16trpart.eps_50
This part is selected
(Movement)
The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)
Parts that do not have performance data
recorded to them.
Solo
Mute
This allows you to prevent the sound for the
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed.
When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set>
to select the drum set or effect sound.
The performance data for the selected part is
deleted.
Clear
This displays the Part Settings screen, in which
you can make detailed settings for each part.
For details refer to p. 137.
Part
The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of
the screen.
The Tone Set screen appears. For details refer
to p. 138.
Tone Set
4. Touch
for the corresponding item to change
■ Modifying the Settings of Each Part
the setting.
You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the
playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the
16-track Sequencer and the internal songs.
You can adjust the values by touching the desired
parameter and turning the dial or by touching and
dragging the slider.
→ Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are
also made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the
individual Parts and play them back in the same way.
Display
Volume
Explanation
Changes the volume level.
First, select the song for which the settings are to be made
(p. 75).
Changes the amount of reverb effect
applied to the sound.
Reverb
Chorus
Changes the amount of chorus applied.
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 136).
Shifts the direction from which the sound is
heard between left and right.
2. Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want
to make settings.
Panpot
Touch
to shift the sound to the right,
to shift it to the left.
Change the settings for the selected Part.
or touch
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Getting the Most Suitable Part
Tones for the Musical Genre
(Tone Set)
What’s Panpot?
Panpot is the control that determines the placement of
the sound in the stereo sound field between left and
right speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can
change the perceived location of the sound between
the left and right speakers.
“Tone Set” is a function that automatically assigns the most
suitable tones for the selected musical style.
When you’re creating a song, you can assign Tone sets, then
change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song.
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 136).
2. Touch <Tone Set> in the lower part of the screen.
When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, you
hear what the song sounds like as you change the
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-16trtone.eps_50
settings. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)]
button, playback of the song stops.
5. Touch
to make settings for other parts.
The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.
Change the settings for other parts as needed.
6. Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press the [
(Reset)] button.
This operation set the changes in the settings.
The song can then be saved to an external memory or to
user memory.
3. Touch the screen to select a musical genre.
4. Press the [Exit] button.
If you do not want to delete a song after changing the
settings for the individual parts, save the song to an
external memory or to user memory (p. 116).
The 16-track Sequencer screen appears.
Tones for each part are assigned automatically.
*
You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds
for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute).
*
In some genres, some parts may have no tone assigned.
If the Following Message Appears
If you try to display another screen after you’ve changed the
song’s settings for each Part, a message like the one below
may appear.
fig.m-songmod.eps
Touch <OK> to change the song’s settings.
Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes you’re made.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
❍ Prepare for New Song Recording
■ Recording a Performance
❍ Start Recording
Selecting the Song to Record
1. Hold down the [Song] button and press the [
(Rec)]
Selecting the Part to Record
button.
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 136).
2. Touch the number for the Part you want to record.
The button for the touched part being set turns orange.
The following screen is displayed if there is any
previously recorded performance or any song with
changed settings.
fig.m-songmod.eps
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on
Part D (10) or Part S (11). You can select drum sets or
effect sounds by selecting Part D (10) or Part S (11) and
touching <Drum Set>.
Selecting the Sound to Play
3. Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.
After selecting a Tone, press the [Exit] button to call up
the “16-Track Sequencer screen.”
Determining the Song’s Beat and Tempo
Recording the Performance
2. Press the [Metronome] button to select the beat (p. 54).
4. Press the [
(Reset)] button.
Recording will start at the beginning of the song.
→ You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. If you
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through
the song, take a look at “Changing the Beat in the Middle of a
Song (Beat Map)” (p. 150).
If you want to record from a point other than the
beginning, use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)]
buttons to select another measure to begin.
5. Press the [
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
3. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the basic
light up.
The KR is put in recording standby.
If you do not need the metronome sound, press the
[Metronome] button once more.
6. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
→ When using song data that has already been recorded, the
recording is made using the source song’s basic tempo. To
change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to “Changing the
Tempo of Recorded Songs” (p. 151).
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
7. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and
recording another part. Continue layering parts to finish
recording the song.
→ If necessary, choose a recording method. For more on how to
record, refer to the following paragraph. If you record for the
first time, there’s no need to select the recording method.
*
Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the
power to the KR is turned off. It is a good idea to save song
data to an external memory or user memory. For more
information, refer to “Saving Songs” (p. 116).
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
2. Touch <Rec Mode>.
Changing the Recording
Method (Rec Mode)
A “Rec Mode screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-recmode.eps_50
You can use any of the four methods below to record with
the KR.
Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”
where previously recorded material is erased when new
easily by using this method in combination with other
recording methods.
Replace Recording (p. 140)
This is the normal method for recording. New material is
recorded as previously recorded material is erased.
3. Touch <Rec Mode>
to select the recording
mode.
Mix Recording (p. 141)
New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded.
Display
Recording Method
Replace Recording
Mix Recording
This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record
melodies over prerecorded accompaniment.
Replace
Mix
Loop Recording (p. 141)
Loop
Loop Recording
Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes
are combined with existing music. A convenient feature for
creating rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record
over and over within a selected segment, adding a different
percussion sound with each pass.
Auto Punch-
In/Out
Punch-in recording of the interval
between set markers.
Punch-in recording starting from the
point at which the pedal, the
Manual
Punch-In/Out
Performance Pad or the [
button is pressed.
(Rec)]
Punch-in Recording (p. 142)
For more about Punch In Recording,
refer to p. 142.
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
recorded performance.
You can add tempo changes to a
recorded composition. See p. 151.
Tempo
→ Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is
selected.
4. Press the [Exit] button.
Changing the Recording Method
1. Press the [Menu] button.
Returns to the “Composer Menu” screen.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
Previous Recording
appears.
fig.d-menu1.eps_50
(Replace Recording)
The recording process where previous material is erased as
new material is recorded is called “replace recording.” This
Press the [Exit] button to return to The “Composer
Menu” screen.
The KR is set to the replace recording mode.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in Chapter 4 (p. 104), “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 136).
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Layering a Recording Over
Previously Recorded Sounds
(Mix Recording)
What is Blank Recording?
Blank Recording is recording a number of silent
measures with no content.
You can record a performance layered over a previously
recorded performance. This method is called “Mix
Recording.”
1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.
(Play/Stop)] button.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [
Stop)] buttons both light up, then after two
(Rec)] button and press the
[
Press the [Exit] button to return to The “Composer
Menu” screen.
(Play/
The KR is set to the mix recording mode.
measures of the count sound, recording begins.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
(Redoing Recordings)” (p. 110), “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 136), or other
methods.
3. Without performing anything, record only the
[
(Play/Stop)] button.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [
(Play/
*
After you have finished with mix recording, return to the
usual replace recording mode.
Stop)] buttons both go out, and recording stops.
■ Repeated Recording at the
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 140), select <Loop>.
Same Location (Loop Recording)
Press the [Exit] button to return to The “Composer
Menu” screen.
You can record a specified passage over and over, layering
The recording method changes to loop recording.
3. Press the [
(Rec)] button.
For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a
four-measure segment. First record the bass drum, the snare
drum next, then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different
instrument onto the same four measures. After you have
146) to create as many copies of the four measures as you
need to complete your Rhythm part.
4. Press the Track button for the track to be recorded.
The KR is put in recording standby.
(Play/Stop)] button to begin
recording.
Recording starts from Marker A.
When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to
Marker A, where recording continues.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the
passage you want to record.
Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are
layered over previously recorded sounds.
Take a look at “Setting Markers for Repeated Practice
(Marker)” (p. 98).
6. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button,
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then use “Blank
Recording” to create the necessary number of measures
before placing the markers.
recording stops.
*
After you have finished with loop recording, return to the
usual replace recording mode (p. 140).
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
1. Before you start re-recording, place markers A and B to
define the passage.
You can also use the method described below to set Loop
Recording.
Following the procedures described in “Setting Markers
for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 98), use Markers A
and B to specify the passage.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of
the passage you want to record.
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 140), select <Auto Punch In/
Out>.
fig.d-rec-punch.eps_50
Practice (Marker)” (p. 98).
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures before placing the markers.
2. Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen
(p. 99).
This sets the loop recording mode.
Start a recording.
*
After you have finished with loop recording, touch the
<Repeat> icon in the “Marker screen” once more to
return to the usual replace recording mode.
Recording.”
Menu” screen.
■ Re-Recording Part of Your
3. Begin recording.
Performance (Punch-in Recording)
Begin recording using the procedures described in
“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
Recordings)” (p. 110) or “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 136).
You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a
recorded performance. This recording method is called
“Punch-in Recording.” This convenient function lets you
record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a
prerecorded performance in another section.
Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded
performance plays back.
User Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:
When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased
as recording starts; begin playing now.
Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B
(Auto Punch-In/Out)
When you reach the end of the specified passage,
recording stops, and the KR returns to playback of the
previously recorded performance.
Before you start recording, place markers A and B to
define the passage you want to re-record. Make the
setting for punch-in recording, and re-record just the
passage between markers A and B.
4. When you press the [
Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or
Buttons Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out)
song stops.
❍ Starting Recording from the Measure
You can play back a performance and depress the pedal
at the desired place to start re-recording. Depressing the
pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to
playback.
Specified by Buttons and Pedals
If using the Performance Pads or pedals, you must first
change the function of the pedals and Pads. Follow the
procedures in “Assigning Functions to Pedals and
Instead of pressing the pedal, you can press a
Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions)” (p. 167),
and assign <Auto Punch In/Out> to the buttons or pedal.
performance pad or the[
cancel recording.
(Rec)] button to start and
1. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 140), select <Manual Punch
In/Out>.
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu” screen.
Composing an
Accompaniment By Entering
2. Begin recording.
Begin recording using the procedures described in
“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
Recordings)” (p. 110) or “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 136).
You can enter a chord progression and choose the places
where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an
accompaniment for a song. This feature is called “Chord
Sequencer.”
The previously recorded performance will be played
back.
Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an
accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your
right hand.
Press the pedal to which Punch In/Out is assigned (p.
167), a performance pad, or the [
(Rec)] button to
begin recording, then start your performance.
1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light
Recording stops when you press the pedal, the
The “Composer Menu” screen appears.
the previously recorded performance is played back.
3. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
2. Touch <
> <
> to switch the page, then touch
performance stops.
<Chord Sequencer>.
*
When you’re finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the
The screen like the one shown below is called “Chord
Sequencer screen.”
ordinary Replace Recording mode. Take a look at “Changing
the Recording Method” (p. 140).
fig.d-chordseq.eps_50
This is the “cursor.” The cursor
shows where the chord change
or other information is input.
This is the end of the song. When
continuing to add input, insert
measures by touching <Ins>.
This indicates the position where the
accompaniment pattern (Division) or
the Style Orchestrator changes.
Display
One measure is inserted before the measure
where the cursor is positioned.
Ins
Del
The measure in which the cursor is
positioned is deleted.
Allows input of chords without playing the
keyboard. Refer to “Inputting Chords
without Playing the Keyboard” (p. 144).
Chords
All Clear
Clear
Deletes the data at the cursor position.
Records the input chord progression. Touch
this icon when you have finished inputting
all of the chords.
Execute
3. Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select
a Music Style (p. 61).
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals
and the Performance Pads
4. Press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
→ For instructions on assigning functions, refer to “Assigning
Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/
User Functions)” (p. 167).
5. Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment
pattern.
Refer to “Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer.”
• Inputting a short Intro and Ending
6. When you have finished inputting all the data, touch
Assign “Intro 2/Ending 2" to a pedal or pad.
<Execute>.
• Inputting a “Variation” or “Original” without a Fill-In
Assign “Original/Variation” to a pedal or pad.
When storage of the data is complete, return to The
“Composer Menu” screen.
• Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/C)
Assign “Leading Bass” to a pedal or pad.
Now, press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, and try
playing the melody along with the accompaniment you
created.
• Inputting a break somewhere within the song
Assign “Break” to a pedal or pad.
*
Songs you’ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the
power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to an
external memory or to user memory. Refer to “Saving Songs”
(p. 116).
• Insert half fill-ins (fill-ins lasting half a measure)
Assign “Half Fill In” to a pedal or pad.
Check the Accompaniment You Inserted
Here’s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as
you have input.
Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer
Move the cursor
Change the accompaniment arrangements
1. Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the
beginning of the song.
2. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
performance is played back.
3. Playback stops when you press the [
(Play/Stop)]
button once more.
Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)
1. Use the dial to move the cursor to the input position.
■ Inputting Chords without
Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move
You can use <Chords> at the bottom left of the Chord
Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen.
2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the
accompaniment pattern and arrangement.
1. At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chords>.
Just as when performing with Automatic
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-chordinput.eps_50
Accompaniment, press the keys to specify a chord, and
press a button to select the accompaniment pattern (p.
68). You can change the Style Orchestrator with the
Performance Pads (p. 69).
3. Touch <Ins> once to insert one measure before the
measure where the cursor is currently positioned.
If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is
currently positioned is deleted, while the measures that
follow are moved forward.
To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the
position with input you want to delete, then touch
<Clear>. This deletes the entered setting.
2. Touch
in each to specify the chords.
3. Touch <Execute> to enter the chord.
→ You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When
you add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the
length of the intro is inserted automatically.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
Editing Songs
There are many ways you can edit performances recorded
using the KR Track button or 16-track sequencer.
→ ”PC” stands for “Program Change,” which is a command that
that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a “PC” needs to be
located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be
changed
■ Basic Operation of the Editing
*
Some edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We
recommend saving songs to external memories or to user memory
before editing. For more on how to save songs, refer to “Saving
Songs” (p. 116).
Functions
*
While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the
upper right of the screen is highlighted (text and background
are inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure
number is no longer highlighted.
Editing
4. Touch the item to be edited.
Selecting the Editing Function
5. Set the value with the dial.
1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
To cancel the operation once it is underway, press the
[Exit] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
6. When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
2. Touch <
> <
> to switch the page, then touch
When you are finished editing the setting, return to the
“Song Edit screen.”
<Song Edit>.
A “Song Edit screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-edit1.eps_50
Press the [Exit] button to return to The “Composer
Menu” screen.
→ You can play back edited songs by pressing the [
(Play/
Stop)] button in the “Song Edit screen.”
■ Undoing Edits (Undo)
You can cancel an editing operation that you’ve just carried
out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and
restore data to the way it was before.
*
There are some edits that can’t be restored.
3. Touch an editing function to select that function.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
For more detailed information, refer to the
corresponding page for each function.
fig.d-e-undo.eps_50
Function
Undo
Explanation
Page
p. 145
p. 146
p. 146
Undoes editing operations that
have been performed.
Copy
Copies measures
Evens out sounds in recorded
performances.
Quantize
Delete
Deletes measures.
p. 147
p. 147
p. 148
Insert
Inserts a blank measure.
Transposes parts individually.
Transpose
Erases data in measures, creating
blank measures.
Erase
p. 148
p. 149
p. 149
p. 150
If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and you’re
returned to the Song Edit screen.
Part
Exchange
Exchanges the sounds in parts.
If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on
screen. Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit.
Allows corrections to be made
note by note.
Note Edit
PC Edit
Allows editing of the Tones
changes that occur during a song.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Copying Measures (Copy)
Item
Content
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in
the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy
Copy-destination measure number
To
When “End” is selected, the data is copied to
the end of the song.
when you’re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.
fig.e-copy.e
Times
Number of times the data is to be copied
Ex. To copy measures 5–7 to measure 8.
■ Correcting Timing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Discrepancies (Quantize)
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded
performance by automatically aligning the music with the
timing you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<Copy>.
As an example, let’s say that the timing of some quarter-
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can
quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-copy.eps_50
making the timing accurate.
fig.e-quantize.e
Example: Quarter-note resolution
Actual note data
1
2
2
3
4
Note data after quantization
Example: Sixteenth-note resolution
Actual note data
1
3
4
Item
From
For
Content
Note data after quantization
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be copied
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<Quantize>.
Number of measures to be copied
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-quant.eps_50
Copy-source Track button or part number
Choosing “All” copies all Parts. “- - -” appears
in the <Dst> column.
If you choose a Track, you can only copy to the
selected Track. You cannot copy to the other
Track. “- - -” appears in the <Dst> column.
Src
Dst
Copy-destination part number
Data can be copied in the following three ways:
Replace
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, this previous recording is erased,
and the copied data is written in its place.
Item
From
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be quantized
Mix
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied data is layered over the
previous recording. If the Tones used for the
copy source and copy destination are different,
the copy-destination Tone is used.
For
Number of measures to be quantized
Mode
Track button or part number to be
quantized
Tr/Pt
Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage
in all Parts.
Insert
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied portion is inserted
without erasing the previous recording. The
song is lengthened by the number of inserted
measures.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Inserting Blank Measures
(Insert)
Item
Content
Quantization timing
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This
Select one of the following values
1/2 (half note), 1/4 (quarter note),
1/6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/8 (eighth note),
1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (sixteenth
note), 1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet),
1/32 (thirty-second note)
addition of a blank measure is called “insertion.”
fig.e_insert.e
Resolution
Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7
When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song
Edit screen.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
■ Deleting Measures (Delete)
8
9
10
You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure.
When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the
performance is shifted up to fill the gap. Erasing measures in
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<Insert>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-ins.eps_50
a specified passage is called “deleting.”
fig.e_delete.e
Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5–8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-del.eps_50
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be inserted
Number of measures to be inserted
Track button or part number where data will be
inserted
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, blank measures are
inserted at the same place in all parts.
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be deleted
Number of measures to be deleted
Track button or part number to be deleted
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is deleted.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Transposing Individual Parts
(Transpose)
■ Making Measures Blank
(Erase)
You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.
You can delete the performance data in a specified block of
measures, turning them into blank measures without
reducing the length of the song. This process is called
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<Transpose>.
“erasing.”
fig.e_erase.e
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8
fig.d-e-trans.eps_50
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Blank measures
Follow the steps in “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145)
to choose <Erase>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-erase.eps_50
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be transposed
Number of measures to be transposed
Track button or part number to be transposed
Tr/Pt
Bias
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is transposed.
The range of transposition
You can select the range to transpose the data,
from -24 (two octaves down) to +24 (two
octaves up), adjustable in semitones.
Item
From
For
Content
*
You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and
sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track).
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be erased
Number of measures to be erased
Track button or part number to be erased
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is erased.
Select from the following types of performance
data to erase:
All
All performance data, including notes, tempos,
tones switches, volume changes, etc., are erased.
Tempo
Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for
all measures results in a single, constant tempo.
Event
Prog.Change
Erases the data for switching Tones (p. 145).
Note
Erases only notes.
Except Note
Erases all of the performance data except for the
notes.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Correcting Notes One by One
Item
Content
(Note Edit)
Expression
Erases Expression (volume change) information.
You can make corrections in a recorded performance one
note at a time. This process of making changes in individual
Event
Lyric
Erases only lyrics.
You can make these corrections by using note editing:
• Deleting misplayed notes
• Changing the scale of a single note
(Part Exchange)
• Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity)
• Change the finger number
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part
with the notes recorded for another part. This process of
exchanging parts is called “part exchange.”
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<Note Edit>.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<Part Exchange>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.e-note.e
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-partex.eps_50
Location Pitch Velocity Finger
Number
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the
format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
Touch each
exchange.
to choose Parts you want to
Touch
to select the part with the note to be
corrected. The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or
use < > < > on the screen to find the note to be corrected.
When you’ve found the note you want to correct, touch
“Note” or “Velo.” for the note.
Use the dial to correct the pitch or velocity. If you want to
delete the note, touch <Delete>.
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
button.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Modifying the Tone Changes in
Changing the Beat in the Middle
of a Song (Beat Map)
a Song (PC Edit)
In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the
course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of
a Part). In such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is
This instruction is called a “Program Change” (PC), and
actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the
selected Tone by them are called “PC editing.”
You can create songs that have beat changes during the
course of the song.
*
You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. Before
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
*
It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or
beat that does not contain a program change.
2. Touch <Beat Map>.
The following screen is displayed if there is any
previously recorded performance or any song with
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 145), select
<PC Edit>.
changed settings.
fig.m-songmod.eps
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-pc.eps_50
Touch <OK> to change the song’s settings.
Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes you’re made.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-beatmap.eps_50
Location
Tone Name
The PC-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the
format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
Touch
to select the part with the program
change to be edited.
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or
use < > < > on the screen to find the program change to
be edited.
If you’ve recorded a song or changed a song’s settings
(see p. 137), a message asking you to confirm the
deletion appears.
When you’ve found the Program Change you want to
modify, touch “Tone Name” on the screen.
Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone
with the dial. When selecting Part 10 or 11, select the drum
set or effect sound.
3. Use <
><
> in the screen or the [
(Bwd)]
and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure
whose beat you want to change.
If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
screen.
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
button.
Touch <
Touch <
> to move to the beginning of the song.
> to move to the end of the song.
4. Touch
in each to set the beat.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
5. Touch <Execute>.
Changing the Tempo Within
the Song
The beat change starts with the measure you selected.
Repeat Steps 3–5 to make beat settings in other measures
as needed.
You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.
Recording the Performance
6. Press the [Exit] button twice.
The KR stores song tempo information and performance data
separately. Therefore, when making changes to the tempo in
information independently of the performance data.
This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”
7. Press the [
(Reset)] button to return the measure
number to “1.”
■ Adjusting the Tempo While
8. Start a recording.
Listening to a Song
Record the performance using the procedures described
in “Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance”
(p. 104). Specify the measure, then change the beat.
You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo
changes.
Setting the Rec Mode to “Tempo”
1. Press the [Menu] button.
Changing the Tempo of
Recorded Songs
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic
tempo was initially set when the song was recorded.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
2. Touch <Rec Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-rec-tempo.eps_50
1. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo.
(Rec)] button and press the
[
(Reset)] button.
The song’s basic tempo changes.
The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn
off the power or choose a different song. Save important
song data to external memory or to user memory (p.
116).
*
If the song you’re working on has tempo changes, press the
3. Touch the <Rec Mode>
to select <Tempo>.
[
(Reset)] button to go back to the beginning of the song
This makes the setting for tempo recording.
before you carry out this operation.
Press the [Exit] button a number of times to switch to the
screen where the measure number is indicated in the
upper right of the screen.
When the KR goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo
indication is highlighted.
Recording the Tempo
4. Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to
move slightly before the measure where you want to
change the tempo.
5. Press the [
flashing.
The KR is put in recording standby.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs
6. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button,
recording begins.
Particular Measure
You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected
measure. This is handy when you want to make a sudden
change in tempo.
7. When you get to the place where you want to change
the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial
to vary the tempo as desired.
First, carry out Steps 1–3 of “Changing the Tempo Within the
Song” (p. 151) to make the “Tempo Recording” settings.
recording stops.
1. Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move
The song’s tempo changes.
to the measure where you want to change the tempo.
*
You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
Basic screen.
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the
Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 140).
2. Press the [
flashing.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
The KR is put in recording standby.
3. Use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the
tempo.
4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The song’s tempo changes starts with the measure you
selected.
5. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
change in tempo stops.
*
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the
Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 140).
→ If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,
refer to “Making Measures Blank (Erase)” (p. 148).
Tempo Recording Shortcut
Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press one of the
Tempo [-] [+] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording
settings. Record tempo information. In this case, tempo
recording is canceled when recording ends.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
■ Creating New Styles by
Creating Original Styles
(User Styles)
Although the KR features a variety of internal Music Styles,
you can also create your own. These original Styles are called
“User Styles.”
Combining Internal Music
Styles (Style Composer)
You can create a new style by selecting from among the
Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2,
Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4, Accompaniment 5,
and Accompaniment 6 parts in different Styles. This function
is called the “Style Composer.”
You can use either of the two methods described below to
create a User Style.
Style Composer
*
You can only combine the KR’s built-in Styles.
With this method, you combine internal Music Styles to
create new Styles. You can create a new Style by selecting
from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1,
Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4,
Accompaniment 5, and Accompaniment 6 parts in different
styles.
Displaying the Style Composer Screen
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
fig.d-16tr.eps_50
Style Converter (p. 155)
Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from
songs composed with the 16-track sequencer.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and the
KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the
Style.
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.
2. Touch <
> <
> to display the following
screen.
fig.d-menu1.eps_50
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
3. Touch <Style Composer>.
Icon
Function
*
If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
The Part Settings screen is displayed,
allowing you to make detailed settings
to each part. For more information, take
a look at “Editing the Volume and Effect
Settings for Each Part” (p. 155).
Part
fig.m-styledel.eps
Records the created Style to the Music
Style [User] button. Touch this when
you have finished creating the Style.
Execute
Touch <Cancel> to return to the “Composer Menu” screen.
Selecting the Styles Assigned to Each Part
4. Touch the part to be set.
Save User Styles to external memories, or to user memory (p.
158).
5. Press a Music Style button, then select a Style with the
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is
deleted, and a new User Style is created.
touch screen or the dial.
A “Style Composer screen” like the one shown below
When you have decided on a Style, press the [Exit]
button to display the Style Composer screen.
appears.
fig.d-stylecomp.eps_50
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each
Part.
Deciding on a Style
7. Touch <Execute>.
You have created a new Style.
The User Style is recorded to the Music Style [User]
button. Try playing with the new Style.
*
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to
delete the Style, save it to an external memory or to user
memory. Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 158).
Display
Part
R
B
Rhythm
Bass
❍ Muting Parts for a Particular Division
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific
Divisions.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Accompaniment 1
Accompaniment 2
Accompaniment 3
Accompaniment 4
Accompaniment 5
Accompaniment 6
accompaniment pattern, every part other than
“Accompaniment 1" is muted. With this arrangement, when
the accompaniment pattern changes from the original to the
variation, it creates a more elaborate effect in the
155).
Icon
Function
1. Touch the Style Composer screen to choose the Part
All Clear
Deletes all of the settings.
you want to mute out.
You can mute the sound of particular
Parts in specific Divisions. For more
information, take a look at “Muting
Parts for a Particular Division” (p. 154).
2. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button
Mute
to switch to the division that you want to mute.
3. Touch <Mute> on the screen.
Clear
Deletes the Styles in selected parts.
The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you
selected.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch <Mute>
again.
Finishing the Settings
4. Press the [Exit] button.
*
To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds (intro,
ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately after switching
to the Division.
The Style Composer screen appears.
■ Creating a Style from a Song
You Composed Yourself
(Style Converter)
❍ Editing the Volume and Effect Settings for
Each Part
You can take a song you’ve composed yourself and extract
the portions you need to create your own original Style.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify some of the chords, and the KR
automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the
style. This function is called the “Style Converter.”
Displaying the Part settings screen
1. At the Style Composer screen, touch <Part>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-scomp-part.eps_50
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.
When creating a song in order to create an music style, it’s
good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style.
Style Arrangements
Music Styles created with the Style Converter function are
composed of eight parts: “Rhythm,”
Modifying the Settings of Each Part
“Bass,”“Accompaniment 1,“”Accompaniment 2,”
“Accompaniment 3,””Accompaniment 4,“”Accompaniment
5,” “Accompaniment 6.”
2. Touch the <Part>
to select the part with
the settings to be changed.
The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper
part of the screen.
A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro,
melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.
With the KR, such changes in songs are allocated to the
following six performance states. We call these six parts of a
song “Divisions.”
3. Touch
for each parameter to change the value.
You can also change the values by touching each
parameter name and then using the dial.
Division
Intro
Performance division
Display
Volume
Explanation
Adjusts the volume.
The intro is played at the start of a song.
This is played at the end of a song.
This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
Ending
Original
Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied
to the sound.
Reverb
Chorus
Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied
to the sound.
This is a developmental accompaniment
pattern. It is a variation on an Original.
Variation
Changes the left-right direction from which
the sound appears to come.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
to make a song more lively.
Fill-In To
Variation
Panpot
When you touch
, the sound moves to
to move the sound to
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
to make a song more sedate.
Fill-In To
Original
the right; touch
the left.
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this
screen is displayed. When selecting Rhythm Part, you
can touch <Drum Set> to select the drum set or effect
sound.
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by
increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can
also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the
Divisions.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
A “Style Converter screen” like the one shown appears.
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50
❍ Creating Styles in Auto Mode
Points to note when creating songs
• Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh
chords to create the song. We recommend using
diminished seventh chords to compose the song.
• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
Rhythm
Bass
Accomp Accomp Accomp
1
2
3
D (10)
2
7
8
Parameter
Settings Content
→ When using parts other than Part 2, 7, 8, 9, and D, refer to
Name
“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 157).
Conv.Mode
Switches the mode (Auto/Manual)
Creating songs
Chord root for the segment to be
extracted
1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
Chord Root
Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 136) and other
related sections.
Chord type for the segment to be
extracted (major/minor/seventh)
Chord Type
Division
From
Division
When using music data, first select a song (p. 75).
Measure number of the first measure of
the segment to be extracted
Displaying the Style Converter screen
2. Press the [Menu] button.
For
Number of measures extracted
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
Making the Settings
3. Touch <Style Converter>.
4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the dial to switch the
*
If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected, the
message “Please select a song” appears. Use the [Song] button
to select a song (p. 75), then start the procedure again.
mode to “Auto.”
This makes the setting for the Auto mode.
5. Touch <Chord Root> and <Chord Type>, then use the
dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to
be extracted.
*
If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
fig.m-styledel.eps
6. Touch <Division>, then use the dial to select the
Division.
Display
Intro
Performance division
Intro
Original
Original accompaniment pattern
From the fill-in to the variation
Touch <Cancel> to return to The “Composer Menu” screen.
Please save the User Style on an external memory or in the
internal memory (p. 158).
Fill To
Vari
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is
deleted, and a new User Style is created.
Variation
Fill To Ori
Ending
Variation accompaniment pattern
From the fill-in to the original
Ending
*
Only one measure can be extracted when “Fill To Vari” or
“Fill To Ori” is selected for the Division. The number of
measures may also be limited in other Divisions.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
Creating Songs
7. Touch <From> and <For>, then use the dial to select the
measures to be extracted.
1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
Touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can
listen to performance of the portion which you chose.
Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 136) and other
related sections.
8. Repeat Steps 5–7 to create Styles for all of the
When using music data, first select a song (p. 75).
Divisions.
Displaying the Style Converter screen
2. Press the [Menu] button.
*
If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum pattern.
Deciding on a Style
The “Style Converter screen” appears.
touch <Execute>.
4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the dial to switch the
The User Style is recorded to the [User] button.
mode to “Manual.”
*
*
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to
delete the Style, save it to an external memory or to user
memory. Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 158).
This makes the setting for the Manual mode.
After that, the steps are the same as for “Creating Styles
in Auto Mode” (p. 156).
The following data is saved to the User Style. If a song
includes data other than this, the results you get might not be
what was intended.
When you touch <Play> in the lower part of the screen,
with <Options>.
• Keyboard performance data
• Amount of Reverb effect applied
❍ Changing an Extracted Part
• Amount of Chorus effect applied
You can extract and change part of a song created with 16-
track sequencer.
❍ Creating a Style in Manual Mode
1. At the Style Converter screen (p. 156), touch <Part>.
When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can
clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each
individual chord.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50
Points to Note when Creating Songs
• Record your performance with the three chord types of
diminished seventh, major, and minor.
• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
Accomp Accomp Accomp
Chords Rhythm Bass
1
2
3
Major
Seventh
Minor
2
-
-
7
8
9
2. Touch the performance Part with settings you want to
change.
12
13
14
15
3. Use the dial to specify which 16-track Sequencer
→ The chords all share the same Rhythm Part.
performance part you want to extract.
→ If you want to use the performance of other part, check out
“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 157)
→ In the Manual mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of
the screen. Set the Parts for all chords.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Converter
screen.
The Style Converter screen appears.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
A “Save Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-stylesave.eps_50
Saving a User Style
You can save the User Styles you create to external memories
and the user memory. When saved to the user memory, User
Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off. You can
also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the
Music Style [User] button.
You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory.
What is the User Memory?
The user memory is the area within the instrument
where User Styles created with the KR, sets of User
Programs, and other such data are stored.
Determining the Name of the Style to be
Saved
saved on external memories.
4. Touch <Rename>.
Data saved to the user memory is not deleted, even
when the KR’s power is turned off.
A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-stylename.eps_50
→ When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user
memory and restore the settings to the factory settings, refer to
“Formatting the User Memory” (p. 180).
Preparations for Saving Data
When saving to an external memory, first connect an external
memory to the external memory port.
1. Press the Music Style [User] button.
A “User Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character
group (A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in
the lower part of the screen.
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
2. Touch <File>.
3. Touch <Save>.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button.
Determining the Save Destination
6. Touch <Media>
to select the save-
destination strage media.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
■ Deleting Saved User Styles
7. Touch
to select the save-destination
This deletes User Styles that have been saved to external
memories or in user memory.
number.
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to
that number.
When deleting a User Style on an external memory, first
connect the external memory to the external memory port.
If you select a number with a previously saved User
Style and then save to that number, the previously saved
User Style is deleted. If you do not want to delete the
User Style being saved, select a number in the save-
destination column that does not yet have a name.
1. Press the Music Style [User] button.
A “User Style screen” appears.
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in
the lower part of the screen.
8. Touch <Execute>.
2. Touch <File>.
The saving process starts.
3. Touch <Delete>.
A “Delete Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-styledel.eps_50
* Never turn off the power or eject the external
memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.
4. Touch <Media>
to select the strage
media.
5. Touch
or
to select the Style to be deleted.
6. Touch <Execute>.
The selected Style is deleted.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external
memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles
Specifying the Copy Destination
Copying Styles on External
Memories to the User
Memory
You can take User Styles saved on external memories and
copy them to user memory.
7. Touch <User>
to select the copy destination
for the Style.
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to
that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved Style and
then copy to that number, the previously saved Style is
deleted. If you do not want to lose the Style being saved,
select a number in the save-destination column that does
not yet have a name.
You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and
copy them to external memories.
1. Connect the external memory with the Style to be
copied to the external memory port.
8. Touch <Execute>.
2. Press the [User] button.
The Style on the external memory is copied to user
memory.
A “User Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50
* Never turn off the power or eject the external
memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.
■ Copying Styles Saved in the
User Memory to External
Memories
You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to
external memories.
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in
the lower part of the screen.
In this case, touch the large arrow icon in the center of the
“Copy Style screen” in Step 4 above so that the arrow points
upwards. Turn the KR will copy user memory Styles to the
external memory.
3. Touch <File>.
4. Touch <Copy>.
A “Copy Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-copystyle.eps_50
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying
Styles from external memories to user memory.
Specifying the Copy Source
5. Touch <Media>
to select the copy source
media.
6. Touch <File>
to select the Style you want to
copy.
When “All” is selected, all of the Styles in the selected
folder on the external memory are copied to user
memory.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
■ Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
Changing the Settings for
One-Touch Arranger
(Key Touch)
You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the
keys.
■ Procedure
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Key Touch>.
fig.d-p-key.eps_50
display the Basic screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_50
Display
Fixed
Explanation
Notes sound at an unchanging volume level,
regardless of how lightly or forcefully you
play the keyboard.
2. Press the [Option] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-funcmenu1.eps_50
This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You
can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard
feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for
children, whose hands have less strength.
Light
This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.
You can play with the most natural touch.
This setting is closest to the response of an
acoustic piano.
This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You
have to play the keyboard more forcefully
than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so
the keyboard touch feels heavier. This setting
allows you to add more expression when
playing dynamically.
Heavy
Parameter
Explanation
Name
Refer to “Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
Key Touch
(Key Touch)” (p. 161).
Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or
<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard.
Selects the setting to be specified when the
One Touch Program [Arranger] button is
pressed (p. 162).
One Touch
Setting
To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.
Sets the key at which the keyboard is divided
Split Point
Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the left
to make the key touch lighter.
(the split point) (p. 162).
Arranger
Config.
Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment
plays sounds (p. 162).
→ You can also change the key touch by pressing the [Piano
Designer] button. For more details, refer to the Quick Start.
→ You set the tuning and make a variety of other settings for the
KR starting with the second page of the settings screen.
3. Touch the name of the parameter to be set.
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
■ Changing Music Styles Without
(One Touch Setting)
■ Changing the Keyboard’s Split
Point (Split Point)
This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is
divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using
the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split
performances (p. 32).
Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and
tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected
automatically. However, you can also set it so the tempo and
Tone settings don’t change when you change Music Styles.
The setting is at “F#3” when the KR is powered up.
fig.splitpoint.e
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <One Touch Setting>.
F 3 (Split Point)
fig.d-1touchset.eps_50
B1
B6
Split Point Settings Range
→ The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-hand
section of the keyboard.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Split Point>.
fig.d-splitpoint.eps_50
Display
Explanation
Suitable
Tone
The suitable tone for a Music Style is selected
automatically.
Suitable
Tempo
The suitable tempo for a Music Style is
selected automatically.
Other
Setting
Other settings (Style Orchestrator, etc.) are
changed automatically.
Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off.
Button colors become brighter when the corresponding
settings are switched on.
Touch either <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4> in the lower part
of the screen.
All items are set to ON when you turn on the power.
Parameters switched to OFF do not change, even when the
performance Style is changed.
The key you chose becomes the split point.
To set another key as the split point, touch
the screen, then specify the key.
in
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.
■ Changing How Chords Are
(Arranger Config)
This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are
played, and how the keys are pressed to specify chords.
What are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone?
When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync
Start (p. 65) is turned off, chords are produced when you
play in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This is called the
“chord tone,” and the root of the chord that is played at the
same time is called the “bass tone.”
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Arranger Config>.
fig.d-arrset.eps_50
How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:
• Intelligence 1
Major
Ex:
C
Play the chord root.
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Play the root and
the second key below it.
Touch
Parameter
of each item to make settings.
Value Explanation
Accomp
Major Seventh
Ex: C maj 7
Name
Play the root and
the first key below it.
All Music Style parts
are played.
Minor
Only Music Style
rhythm parts, chord
Tones, and bass Tones
are played.
Accomp
Ex: C m
Play the root and
the third key above it.
Chord&Bs
OFF,
Minor Seventh
Acoustic Bs.,
A. Bass+Cymbl,
Fingered Bs.,
Picked Bass.,
Fretless Bs.,
Slap Bass1,
Organ Bass,
Synth Bass 101,
Thum Voice
Ex: C m7
Play the root,
the third key above it, and
the second key below it.
Selects the bass Tone.
When set to “OFF,” no
tone is played.
Bass Tone
Diminished
Ex:
C dim
Play the root and
the sixth key above it.
OFF, E.Piano1, E.
Piano 2,
Soft E. Piano,
Hard E. Piano,
Slow Strings,
Strings,
Selects the chord
Tone. When set to
“OFF,” no tone is
played.
• Intelligence 2
Major
Chord Tone
Ex:
C
Choir,
Play the root of the chord.
Doos Voice
This selects the way
chords are played
Intelligence function.
When you set this to
“Manual,” play all of
the notes describing
the chord.
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Chord
Manual,
Recognition Intelligence 1,
Mode Intelligence 2
Play the root of the chord
and the white key to the
left of the root.
Minor
Ex: C m
What is Chord Intelligence?
Play the root of the chord
and the black key to the
left of the root.
“Chord Intelligence” (p. 59) is the name of the function that
recognizes the chords being specified for an accompaniment
when only one or two keys of the chords have been pressed,
which can be used while automatic accompaniment is active.
Minor Seventh
Ex: C m7
Play the root of the chord
and the black and white key
to the left of the root.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Count
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected
measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a
position partway through a measure.
→ For detailed information about count, refer to “Match the
Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In)” (p. 96) and
“Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
(Countdown)” (p. 67).
→ For detailed information about Marker, refer to “Setting
Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 98).
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.
The Count screen appears.
2. Touch <Marker>.
The Count screen (p. 96) appears.
2. Touch
of each item to make settings.
3. Press the [Exit] button to return to previous screen.
The Marker screen appears.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
3. Press the [Option] button.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
Parameter Name
Value
Count In
(add a count before the
performance),
4. Touch <Resolution>
to choose the marker
setting.
Countdown
Count Mode
Specify what type of count
will be added.
Indication
Explanation
(add a count only before
you begin playing),
Count In/down
(add both a count-in and a
countdown)
This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the measure.
Measure
Beat
This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the beat.
Countdown Sound
Specify the countdown sound. Voice (English)
Voice (Japanese),
5. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Marker screen.
Countdown Track
Lower & Upper Tracks
Specify the track or part that
will determine the beginning
of the performance when
added a countdown.
Lower Track
Upper Track
Part 1–16
Stick, Click, Electronic,
Voice (Japanese), Voice
(English), Wood Block,
Triangle & Castanets,
Hand clap
Count-In Sound
Specify the count-in sound.
Animal
Measures
Specify the length (number of 1, 2
measures) of the count-in.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Parameter Name
Repeat
When “Repeat” is turned ON
on the Marker screen (p. 101)
this specified whether the
count-in will sound each time
the range between the
Value
Other Settings
You can change the tuning, the language shown on the
display, and other settings to make the KR easier to use.
First Time, Each Time
■ Procedure
1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch
markers is repeated, or only
the first time.
Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
A “Functions screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
the first page displayed shows the parameters for the
Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 161).
Parameter
Tuning
Explanation
Pedal
Setting
Assigns functions to the pedal and
Master Tune
Sets the KR’s standard pitch (p. 170).
External Display
display (p. 170).
Language
User Image
Display
used (p. 170).
Opening
Message
Sets the message that appears when the
power is turned on (p. 171).
MIDI Setting
Refer to p. 189.
Program Change Refer to p. 189.
the KR (p. 171).
Memory Backup
MIDI Ensemble
Refer to p. 189.
Restores the content stored with
Memory Backup to the original factory
settings (p. 172).
Factory Reset
V-LINK
Refer to p. 187.
Refer to p. 196.
USB Driver
Changing the functions of the remote
control’s buttons (p. 172).
Remote Control
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
Explanation
Tuning
system
Characteristics
Allows for calibration of the touch
screen (p. 175).
Touch Screen
This tuning is suitable for the music of
Arabia.
Arabic
Sets the remote sensor’s on or off
(p. 174)
Ir/Serial Port
This temperament is a modification of
meantone temperament and just
intonation, allowing more freedom of
modulation. Performances are possible
in all keys (III).
Kirnberger
3. Touch the name of the parameter you want to set.
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
This temperament is based on the
theories of the Greek philosopher
Pythagoras, and has pure fourths and
fifths. Chords containing a third will
sound impure, but melodies will sound
good.
Pythagorean
■ Changing the Tuning (Tuning)
❍ Choosing the Tuning
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic
temperaments (tuning methods).
This temperament is a partial
compromise of just intonation in order
to allow modulation.
Meantone
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at
one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems
in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use
when a composition was created, you can experience the
sonorities of chords originally intended for that song.
This temperament is a combination of
meantone and Pythagorean
temperaments. It allows you to play in
all keys. (First method, number three.)
Werkmeister
Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system.
When playing in a temperament other than equal
temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note
corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key)
of the key in which you will play.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Tuning>.
fig.d-p-temp.eps_50
Touch <Key>
to select the tonic.
If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to
select the tonic.
❍ Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)
Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and
the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This
method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as
“stretched tuning.”
You can choose from among the eight tunings described
below.
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces
subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.
Tuning
Characteristics
system
This temperament divides the octave
into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be
Equal
slightly out of tune by the same amount.
This setting is in effect when you turn on
the power.
Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> icon to select the
tuning curve.
When set to “ON,” the tuning curve features extended low
and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano
solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on.
This temperament makes the 5th and
3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to
playing melodies and cannot be
transposed, but is capable of beautiful
sonorities.
Just (Maj)
Just (min)
When set to “OFF,” the standard tuning curve is used. It is
suitable when playing in an ensemble with other
instruments.
Just intonation differs between major
and minor keys. The same results as
major can be obtained in a minor key.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
❍ Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals,
■ Assigning Functions to Pedals
and Performance Pads
Performance Pads)
(Pedal Setting/User Functions)
Function
Explanation
You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center
pedals, the expression pedals, and the performance pads.
Toggles the Leading Bass function* on or
off. The function stays on as long as the
pedal to which this is assigned is pressed.
When assigned to a Performance Pad, this
is alternately switched on and off each time
the pad is pressed.
Leading
Bass
You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the
corresponding pedal or pad.
925
*
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you
risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
Only the Rhythm part is played. After No
Chord is switched on, specifying a chord
by playing the actual keys cancels the
function, and all of the accompaniment
parts are played.
No Chord
Break
❍ Assigning Functions to Pedals
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Pedal Setting>.
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50
During the performance of Automatic
Accompaniment, the accompaniment
stops for one measure only.
Fill In to
Variation
Performs the same function as the Fill In
[To Variation] button (p. 68).
Fill In to
Original
Performs the same function as the Fill In
[To Original] button (p. 68).
A fill-in is inserted, but the accompaniment
pattern after that doesn’t change.
Fill In
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,
then switches to the Variation
accompaniment pattern.
Half Fill In to
Variation
Touch
to assign functions to each of the pedals.
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,
then switches to the Original
accompaniment pattern.
Half Fill In to
Original
→ Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores the
piano performance functions to the pedals (p. 22).
Original/
Variation
without inserting a fill-in.
❍ Assigning Functions to Performance Pads
When this function is used during
Automatic Accompaniment, the
accompaniment returns to the beginning of
the Division (p. 57).
1. Press the [User Function] button and watch the
Arranger
Reset
indicator light up.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-usrfunc.eps_50
Ending] button (p. 65). Intro 1 and Ending
1 are played.
Intro 1/
Ending 1
Performs the same function as the [Intro/
2 are played.
Intro 2/
Ending 2
Arranger
Start/Stop
Stop] button (p. 65).
Orchestrator This changes the accompaniment to a more
Up elavorate arrangement (p. 69).
Orchestrator Changes the accompaniment to a simpler
Down
arrangement (p. 69).
2. Touch
to assign functions to each of the
Turns the Melody Intelligence function on
and off (p. 70).
Melody
Intelligence
Performance Pads.
→ If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User
Programs, the function assigned to the pedal cannot be used.
Refer to “Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs” (p. 134).
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
❍ Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals
Function
Explanation
Only)
This starts Automatic Accompaniment
with a fade-in (where the volume gets
progressively louder), ends it with a fade-
out (where the volume gets progressively
softer), then stops.
Function
Explanation
Fade In/Out
Pressing the pedal during playback of a song
stops the playback. When the pedal is
beginning of the measure that was playing
when the pedal was pressed. When the pedal
is pressed in rapid succession, the playback
will resume backs up the same number of
measures as the number of times the pedal is
pressed.
Rotary Slow/ This switches the speed of the rotary effect*
Composer
Assist
Fast
when you perform with an organ tone.
While the pedal or Performance Pad is held
down, the pitch of the sound drops
temporarily, returning to the original pitch
when the pedal or Pad is released. This can
be effective for simulating the performance
of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar.
Glide
Upper
The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal
Sostenuto (p. 22).
Composer
Play/Stop
Performs the same function as the [
(Play/Stop)] button (p. 75).
Upper Soft The pedal functions as a soft pedal (p. 22).
Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds
in the left-hand side of the keyboard during a
split performance.
Lower
Damper
If a song is stopped with the notation
shown in the KR display, the notation in
the KR display scrolls to the next page
when you press the pedal.
Page
Fwd 1
This raises the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
Bend Up
If a song is stopped with the notation
shown in the KR display, the notation in
the KR display scrolls to the preceding
page when you press the pedal.
Bend
Down
This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
Page
Bwd 1
When the pedal is pressed during a layer
performance, the Tone volume changes
between two levels, depending on how firmly
the pedal is pressed.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1” selected
increases the layer Tone volume. The layer
Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of
how forcefully the keys are played.
If a song is stopped with the notation
shown in the external display, the notation
page when you press the pedal.
Page
Fwd 2
EX1
EX2
If a song is stopped with the notation
in the external display scrolls to the
Page
Bwd 2
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2” selected
increases the layer Tone volume, while the
volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
regardless of how forcefully the keys are
played.
preceding page when you press the pedal.
During Punch-in Recording, this starts and
stops recording (p. 142).
Punch In/Out
You can set the tempo according to the
interval at which the pedal or pad is
pressed (p. 95).
Tap
Tempo
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3” selected
increases the layer Tone volume.
EX3
EX4
* What is the leading bass function?
increases the layer Tone volume, while the
volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased.
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord
as the bass tone is called “Leading Bass.” When this function
is turned on, the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions
are used. Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as
the bass tone.
*
if “Pedal EX1–4” is assigned to more than one pedal.
→ Using the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function during a
split performance (p. 31) changes the pitch of sounds in the
right-hand side of the keyboard. Additionally, the range in
which the pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is
called the “bend range”; refer to “Changing the Bend Range
(Pedal Setting)” (p. 169).
* What is the rotary effect?
This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar
to the sound when a rotary speaker is used.
Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this
spinning effect.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
❍ Functions that can be assigned (Expression
■ Changing the Bend Range
Pedals Only)
(Pedal Setting)
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
played note is called the “bender effect.”
Function
Expression Adjusts the overall volume.
When the pedal is pressed during a layer
Explanation
You can assign the bender function to a pedal, then apply the
bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal.
performance, the Tone volume changes
between two levels, depending on how
firmly the pedal is pressed.
You can also make a setting that determines how much the
pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The
maximum range of change in pitch is called the “bend
range.”
EX1
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1”
selected increases the layer Tone volume.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
regardless of how forcefully the keys are
played.
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Pedal Setting>.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2”
selected increases the layer Tone volume,
while the volume of the right-hand Tone is
decreased. The layer Tone is played at a
fixed volume, regardless of how forcefully
the keys are played.
Touch
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50
to switch the screens.
EX2
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3”
selected increases the layer Tone volume.
EX3
EX4
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX4”
selected increases the layer Tone volume,
while the volume of the right-hand Tone is
decreased.
Touch <Bend Range>
setting.
to adjust the bend range
You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in
half-tone steps, up to one octave).
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
■ Changing Standard Pitch
■ Selecting Images To Be Shown
on the KR and External
Displays
“Standard pitch” generally refers to the pitch that is heard
when you play middle A. When performing in an ensemble
with other instruments, adjust the standard pitch so that the
instruments of the ensemble match. Tuning all the
(User Image Display)
You can have image data from computers and other devices
“KR display” data, and “Ext. display” data.
instruments to a standard pitch is called “master tuning.”
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Master Tune>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-tuning.eps_50
instrument’s power is turned on.
When you select “Automatic” or “Lyrics” as the image type to
be shown with the external display as described in “Changing
the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display
and the Television (External Display)” (p. 186), the images are
shown in the external display.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <User Image
Display>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-usrimage.eps_50
Touch
to change the pitch.
■ Changing the Language
(Language)
Five choices are available for the language used in displaying
information on the screen.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Language>.
Selecting the Display to be Set
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lang.eps_50
1. Touch <KR Display> or <Ext. Display>.
Select the setting either for “KR display” or “Ext.
display” images.
Selecting the Images to be Displayed
First, take an external memory to which the image data
stored in the KR has been saved, and connect the
external memory to the external memory port.
2. Touch <File>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Touch
to select the language.
Available settings
English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish
*
German, Spanish, and French are displayed for some
functions. Other screens will be displayed in English.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
fig.d-usrimage2.eps_50
When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the
character appears at the cursor position. For example,
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through
the available choices in that character group
(A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through
“English (upper case),” “English (lower case),” “numerals,”
“symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is
deleted.
3. Touch the name of the stored image data.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
When you touch <Preview>, you can then show the
selected image data on the display selected in Step 1.
When you have finished inputting the characters, touch
<Execute>.
4. Touch <Save>.
The selected image data is stored.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s
internal memory, making it unusable.
5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
To clear the stored image data, touch <Erase>.
→ If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen and then
touch <Execute>, the display reverts to the screen that
normally appears when you turn on the power to the
instrument.
❍ Image data that KR can display
Size
(Recommen
320 x 240 pixels (for KR display)
640 x 480 pixels (for external display)
ded)
■ Remembering the Settings
Even When the Power is
Format
BMP format, JPEG format
“.bmp”, “.jpg”
Extension
when the power is turned off. However, you can specify that
the settings will be remembered even when the power is
turned off. This function is called “Memory Backup.”
When the Power Is Turned On
(Opening Message)
→ For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup, refer to
You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase
when the power is turned on.
“Parameters Stored in Memory Backup” (p. 216).
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Memory Backup>.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Opening Message>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-memory.eps_50
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-openmsg.eps_50
Touch <Execute>.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
Touch <OK> to store the setting.
Use
to move the cursor.
When you touch the character icon, the character is input
where at the position.
When the setting has been stored in memory, the previous
screen will reappear.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
internal memory, making it unusable.
Remote Control’s Buttons
You can change the functions assigned to the remote
control’s buttons.
■ Restoring the Factory Settings
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Remote Control>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
(Factory Reset)
You can return the content stored with “Memory Backup” (p.
171) and the User Programs (p. 129) to their original factory
settings. This operation is referred to as “Factory Reset.”
*
stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their
factory defaults.
settings to the original factory condition. To return the touch
to “Returning the Touch Screen Calibration Settings to the
Original Factory Settings” (p. 175)
Switching ON/OFF of the Remote Control
→ When you want to restore the content registered to the KR’s
User memory to the factory condition, refer to “Formatting the
User Memory” (p. 180).
1. Touch <ON/OFF>
to switch On/Off of the
remote control.
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch “Factory Reset.”
Display
Explanation
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-factory.eps_50
Off
On
Not received.
Received.
2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
Changing the [FUNC1] [FUNC2] Button
Functions
1. Touch <FUNC1> <FUNC2>
to assign
functions to [FUNC1] [FUNC2] button.
Touch <Execute>.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
Touch <OK> to restore the original factory settings.
Display
Explanation
Each time the [FUNC1] or [FUNC 2]
button is pressed, the piano player
function is switched on or off.
When you have finished making the settings, switch off the
power, then switch it back on again.
Moving Key
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]
button is pressed, switch the color used for
lyric in the external display.
When you touch <Cancel>, the settings are left untouched,
and you’re returned to the previous screen.
Lyric Color
Replay
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s
internal memory, making it unusable.
Pressing the button while the song is
playing back stops the playback. When
you release the button, playback resumes
from the beginning of the measure being
played when you pressed the button.
Pressing the button a number of times in
rapid succession moves the playback
position back by the same the number of
measures, after which playback resumes.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Changing the TEMPO [-] [+] Button and the
TRANSPOSE [-] [+] Button Functions
Display
Explanation
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]
button is pressed, the lower track is
switched on or off. When turned off, the
sound from the lower track does not play.
Track 3
1. Touch <TEMPO> or <TRANSPOSE>
to
assign functions to TEMPO [-] [+] and TANSPOSE [-]
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]
button is pressed, the upper track is
switched on or off. When turned off, the
sound from the upper track does not play.
[+] button.
Track 4
Display
Tempo
Explanation
Changes the tempo. Pressing [-] button
slows the tempo down; pressing [+] button
speeds up the tempo.
Zoom
Displays an enlarged notation.
Repeat
Playback repeats within the marked range.
Ir/Serial port
(Only with
models
featuring CD is pressed.
Drive)
Scrolls the notation in the external display.
Press [-] button to return to the previous
page; press [+] button to advance to the
next page.
The setting alternately switches to the
infrared or serial port each time the button
Notation
Transposes the song. Pressing [-] button
lowers the pitch in semitone steps;
pressing [+] button raises the pitch in
semitone steps.
2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
Transpose
Bwd/Fwd
Changing the [
] (PLAY) Button Functions
Fast forwards and rewinds the song. When
[-] button is pressed, the song rewinds;
when [+] button is pressed, the song is fast
forwarded.
1. Touch <PLAY>
to assign functions to
[
] (PLAY) button.
CD Volume
(Only with
models
featuring CD
Drive)
Display
Explanation
Changing the volume of the Song on CDs
Only the selected song is played back.
Playback stops when the song is finished.
One Song
Songs are played back continuously in
sequence, starting from the currently
selected song.
CD sync
(Only with
models
featuring CD
Drive)
Synchronizing the piano and
accompaniment.
Internal Song
Songs in the selected genre are played back
continuously.
All Song
2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
“Favorites” Songs
Songs registered to the “Favorites” are
played back in sequence.
*
The remote control buttons’ original function assignments are
restored when the power is turned off. If you want to save the
changed settings, carry out the memory backup (p. 171).
Songs on External Memories, Floppy
Disks, and CDs
Songs within the selected folder are played
back continuously.
The songs are played back in random
order.
Internal Song
The songs in all genres are played back in
random order.
“Favorites” Songs
Songs registered to the “Favorites” are
played back in random order.
Random
Songs on External Memories, Floppy
Disks, and CDs
Songs within the selected folder are played
back in random order.
2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Models Without Moving Key
■ Changing the Infrared
Transmission Function Settings
Some digital devices equipped with an IrDA (infrared) port
are able to transfer song data in SMF format to the KR. For
more detailed information, refer to the owner's manual for
the digital device.
Note:
Users are responsible for learning how to use infrared
transmissions. The KR is not necessarily compatible with all
devices equipped with an IrDA port. Roland cannot answer
questions regarding infrared transmissions.
Touch <ON/OFF>
.
Serial Port
Display
Explanation
You cannot simultaneously use the remote sensor and
infrared receive with the KR.
Off
On
Not used.
The infrared receriver is used.
You can choose to use either one, or to switch both of them
off.
Setting Playback After the Song is Transferred
(Infrared Playback)
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch <Ir/Serial Port>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
This sets the KR to play back a song automatically following
transfer of the song from the digital device.
Models Featuring CD Drive
You can also set this so that songs are not played back
automatically after the song is transferred.
Touch <Ir Play>
.
Display
Explanation
Following transfer of the song, the song is
ready to play but not played back.
Standby
The song is played back automatically
after the song is transferred.
Auto
Touch <Ir/Serial>
.
Display
Explanation
Off
Ir
Neither is used.
The infrared receriver is used.
The device connected to the serial port is
used.
Serial Port
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Changing the Part That
(Touch Screen)
Makes the Keys Move
(Only for Instrument Equipped with
Moving Key)
If you’ve been using the touch screen for some time, the
pointer may be shifted, making the KR react incorrectly. You
should correct this displacement when necessary by
performing calibration (repositioning).
Changing the Moving Keys Settings
You can have the keys move automatically along with the
performance.
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 165), touch “Touch Screen.”
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
fig.d-16tr.eps_50
Touch <Execute>.
Touch the points indicated.
*
Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different
from the one indicated for the pointer may make the
displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer
accurately.
2. Touch <Moving Key> at the lower left of the screen to
switch the function on or off.
Icon
Keyboard
When the calibration is finished, touch <Write> to store the
settings.
On
Off
Movement
No movement
*
If you don’t write them to memory, the calibration settings
will be discarded as soon as the power is switched off.
3. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
Returning the Touch Screen Calibration
Settings to the Original Factory Settings
If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch
screen calibration settings revert to the original factory
settings.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Using the Track Buttons to Choose the Part
That Makes the Keys Move
Using the 16 Track Sequencer Screen to
Choose the Part That Makes the Keys Move
Upon power-up, the instrument is set so the keys move along
with the performances of the Whole, Upper, and Lower
tracks. You can choose a different part to make the keys
move by pressing the Track buttons, and changing the
buttons that are lighted.
You can get the keys to move along with the performance of
parts selected with the 16 Track Sequencer screen.
1. Choose the song to play (p. 75).
2. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
1. Choose the song to play (p. 75).
2. Press the Track button you want to have associated
with key movement a number of times, until the
button’s light is flashing.
3. Touch <16tr Sequencer>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-16tr.eps_50
Each time you press a Track button, its light changes to
the next state, in this order: lighted → extinguished →
flashing → lighted →....
The following shows the relationship between the Track
buttons, played parts, and keyboard movement.
Indicator
Indicator flashing
Indicator on
Keyboard
Movement
Sound
Sound
No movement
No movement
Sound
Indicator off
No sound
4. Touch the part you want to have associated with key
movement.
3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The following shows the relationship between the
indication in the display (icons), played parts, and
keyboard movement.
Song playback starts, and the keys move along with
what is played as a result of the flashing Track button or
buttons.
Icon
Keyboard
Movement
Sound
Sound
No Movement
(This part is not
selected)
Sound
No sound
No movement
No movement
(no performance data for
this part)
No sound
5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
■ Setting the Type of CD To Be
Changing the CD Settings
(Only for Instrument Equipped with CD
Drive)
Played Back
The KR may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD
being used. In such instances, you can specify the type of CD
manually.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
2. Touch <
> <
> to switch the page, then touch
<CD>.
2. Touch <
> <
> to switch the page, then touch
A screen like the one shown below appears.
<CD>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
→ This screen is displayed when “CD” is selected as the category
in the “Song Select” screen, even when you press the [Option]
button.
→ This screen is displayed when “CD” is selected as the category
in the “Song Select” screen, even when you press the [Option]
button.
3. Touch the slider for the respective parameter to change
the setting.
3. Touch the <CD Data>
to select the type of
Display
Setting
Explanation
CD.
With some player piano CDs, the
piano and accompaniment
Display
Explanation
sounds may not be synchronized
properly. In such instances, you
can adjust the timing of the piano
sounds so that they are in time
with the accompaniment.
Sync
0–100
Auto
The CD type is detected automatically.
General CDs for Player Piano contain audio
and MIDI data, and the data format may
vary from one CD to the next. If the CD’s
data format does not match the KR’s settings,
a “beep” will sound. Certain general
Automatic Piano CDs may not be playable
on the KR.
Type A
Level
0–127
Adjusts the CD volume level.
Type B
Off
4. Press [Exit] button to go back to The “Composer Menu”
screen.
Commercial Audio CD (CDs other than
those designed for use with the piano player
piano)
*
Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played
back on the KR.
4. Press [Exit] button to go back to The previous screen.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Running the Slide Show
Showing a Series of Images
on an External Display
(Slide Show)
You can use the KR to display your favorite images stored on
external memory using a connected external display or
television set.
4. Connect the external memory to the external memory
port.
A slide show of the images stored in the “_PICTURE”
folder on the USB memory appears on the external
display.
→ The “Mode” value in the External Display Setting screen
automatically changes to “Slide Show.”
Making the Connection
ÉåÉCÅAÉfÉWÉJÉÅÇ∆äOïîÉÅÉÇÉäÅj
The “Mode” value may not automatically switch to “Slide
Show” while Wonderland, Demo, or certain other functions
are in use.
Afterwards, select “Slide Show” for the “Mode” setting
manually in the “External Display Setting” screen.
External memory
connector
Changing the Sequence of Images in Slide
Shows
You can have images be displayed in the order you
prefer by changing the file names.
→ For details about connecting an external display, refer to p.
185.
By adding a number from 001 through 999 to the six- to
eight-character file name, you can have the files be
displayed according to their numerical order.
NOTE
Some images may not be displayed in the slide show if 500 or
more files, including images, are contained in a single folder.
■ Changing Slide Shows
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The piano screen will appear.
❍ Image data that KR can display
Size
640 x 480 pixels (recommended)
BMP format, JPEG format
“.bmp”, “.jpg”
Format
Extension
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch the <External Display> (p. 165).
The following screen will appear.
■ Running a Slide Show of
Images Stored on External
Memory
Preparing the Images
1. Using a computer, prepare the images you want to
display.
2. Connect the USB memory to the computer and create a
folder named “_PICTURE” on the USB memory.
3. Place the images you want to display in the
4. Touch the <Mode>
to select a value other
“_PICTURE” folder.
than “Slide Show.”
5. Press [Exit] button to go back to The “Functions
screen.”
→ You can change the “Mode” value by pressing [DISPLAY] on
the remote control.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
■ Setting the Image Display
Selecting the Part to Which
the Effect is Added
(EffectsPart)
You may find effects not being applied to certain parts when
different effects are applied to the upper tone, layer tone, and
lower tone. In such instances, you can select which effect is to
have priority.
Duration
When running slide shows of multiple image files saved on
external memory, you can specify the length of time each
image is to appear.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The piano screen will appear.
2. Press the [Option] button.
1. Press any tone button, and select the tone (p. 28).
2. Touch <Effect>.
3. Touch the <External Display>.
4. Touch the <Slide Show> at the bottom left of the
3. Touch <Part>.
screen.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
The following screen will appear.
4. Touch
is added.
to select the part to which the effect
5. Touch the <Interval>
to set the interval at
which the displayed images are to be switched.
The effect will be applied to the selected part and other
parts to which the same effect has been applied.
Available settings
Slow, Little Slow, Medium, Little Fast, Fast
Available settings
Upper, Layer 1, Layer 2, Lower 1, Lower 2
Display of images may not, depending on the size of the
image, be displayed exactly according to the interval
setting.
6. Press [Exit] button to go back to the ”Functions screen.”
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
The KR features an internal storage area where you can save
recorded performances and User Styles. This space is called
the “User Memory.”
Automatically Starting the
Quick Tour
You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts
automatically with no operation required.
The following content is stored to the user memory.
• Content registered to the “Favorites” (p. 82)
• Sets of saved User Programs (p. 131)
1. Hold down the [Transpose] button and press the
[Surround/Reverb] button.
• User Styles saved on user memory (p. 158)
• Image files set with the “User Image settings” (p. 170)
The Quick Tour screen appears.
2. Press the [Option] button.
To delete all of the content held in the user memory and
restore the original factory settings, carry out the following
procedure.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
1. Press the [Song/File] button.
2. Touch <File>.
3. Touch <Format>.
4. Touch
to select “User.”
5. Touch <Execute>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
3. Touch
of each parameter to make settings.
Item
Display
Explanation
This setting determines
whether or not Quick Tour
starts when no adjustment
or other operation is
Auto Start ON, OFF
performed within a fixed
period of time.
This setting determines
whether or not
6. Touch <OK>.
BGM
ON, OFF
background music is
added when Auto Demo
begins.
All of the content in the user memory is deleted.
If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled, and
you’re returned to the previous screen.
When Auto Start is set to “ON,” a period of five to ten
minutes passes without the instrument being touched,
the demo automatically starts. The demo stops playing if
the instrument is operated in any way. When Auto Start
is set to “OFF,” the demo does not start unless you touch
the <Auto Demo> icon in the Demo screen.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s
internal memory, making it unusable.
→ Carrying out this operation does not initialize any settings
other than the user memory settings. To restore settings other
than those for the user memory to the original factory settings,
carry out Factory Reset (p. 172).
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Quick Tour
screen.
→ This setting is saved even after the power is turned off.
*
For more information about Quick Tour, refer to the Quick
Start.
*
You cannot start the demo songs if you have any performance
recorded but not saved. Before starting the demo, either delete
or save the song when the song delete screen(p. 104) is
displayed.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
Adjusting the Piano Designer
Resonance
You can made precise changes to the Piano Designer
“Resonance” setting.
Disabling Functions Other
Than Piano Performance
(Panel Lock)
The “Panel Lock” function locks the KR in a state where only
piano performance can be used, and all buttons will be
disabled. This prevents the settings from being inadvertently
modified even if children press the buttons accidentally.
More of the resonance effect is applied as the value is
increased.
1. Press the [Piano Designer] button.
*
In the Panel Lock state, only the grand piano sound can be
played.
2. Press the [Option] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
1. Turn down the volume all the way.
2. Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.
3. While holding down the [Wonderland/Game] button,
press the [Power] switch and turn on the power.
Hold down the button for at least ten seconds (until the
animation is displayed).
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.
Adjust the volume. When you play the keyboard, the
grand piano sound will be heard.
To undo the Panel Lock function, turn the volume down
to the minimum, and turn on the power once again.
3. Touch
of each item to make settings.
Item
Explanation
With an acoustic piano, playing a
note causes the strings for other keys
already being pressed to resonate.
The function that reproduces this
resonant sound is called “String
Resonance.”
String
When the damper pedal on an
acoustic piano is pressed, the sound
of the key that is played causes other
strings to resonate, adding rich
reverberation and breadth to the
sound. This function reproduces the
resonant sound created by pressing
the damper pedal (Damper
Damper
Key off
Resonance).
This reproduces the “key off” sound
(the subtle sound made when the
keys are released) produced when
playing an acoustic piano.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
■ Viewing Song Information
Detailed Song Playback
Settings
(Information)
You can view file names and other information concerning
songs.
■ Changing the Tone Settings
When Playing Back Songs
1. Press the [Song/File] button.
With the normal setting, GS tones (sounds that are
compatible with other GS instruments) will normally be used
to play back song data. By changing this setting, you can play
back song using KR-specific tones for certain portions of the
data.
3. Touch <Information>.
A song information is displayed.
■ Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics)
Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke,
as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data.
When you play such music files, the lyrics automatically
appear in the screen. If you do not want lyrics to appear
automatically, set this to “OFF.”
→ For detailed information about GS, refer to “About the KR
Sound Generator” (p. 217).
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
2. Touch
to switch the screens, touch <Play
Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-plymode.eps_60
2. Touch
to switch the screens, then touch
<Lyrics>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lyric.eps_60
3. Touch the icon to choose the setting.
Icon
Explanation
Playback uses GS-compatible tones for
performances that sound like other GS
instruments.
3. Touch
to select the setting.
GS
KR
Display
Explanation
Playback uses KR tones for greater
expressiveness. However, differences may
appear when playing back using devices
other than the KR.
Lyrics are displayed automatically (when
performance data containing lyrics is played
back).
ON
Lyrics are not displayed, even if the song
OFF
4. Press the [Exit] button to go back to The “Composer
Menu” screen.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to The “Composer
5. After changing this setting, try selecting the song once
Menu” screen.
again.
→ Even when this is set to “OFF,” you can still have the lyrics be
For more detailed information about selecting a song,
refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 75).
displayed by touching <
> when it appears in the
Piano or Basic screen (p. 26).
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
→ The screen may be switched when you press the button while
Display
Auto
Explanation
the Lyrics screen is displayed. To have the lyrics displayed
The part assigned to each track will be
determined automatically,
depending on the song data.
again, touch <
> on the Piano or Basic screen, or stop
playback of the song, then press the [
button.
(Play/Stop)]
Part 1 will be assigned to the upper part
track, part 2 to the lower part track, and part
3 to the user track.
2/1 Part
3/4 Part
■ Changing the Parts Assigned
to the Track Buttons During
SMF Playback (Track Assign)
Part 4 will be assigned to the upper part
track, part 3 to the lower part track, and part
Normally, when playing back Roland Piano Digital-
compatible SMFs (p. 217), the lower part is assigned to the
[3/Lower] button, and the upper part is assigned to the [4/
Upper] button. However, assignment of the upper and lower
parts may differ with some SMF data.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to The “Composer
Menu” screen.
After changing this setting, try selecting the song once
again.
For more detailed information about selecting a song,
refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 75).
If you cannot get the upper and lower parts to work well set
on “Auto,” then change the setting to “2/1 Part” or “3/4
Part.”
→ This setting can be used with songs stored in external memory
and on CDs, and songs in SMF format. The setting does not
work with internal songs or songs registered to the Favorites.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
Touch
to switch the screens.
2. Touch <Track Assign>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-trkasgn.eps_60
3. Touch
to select the setting.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Various Settings
MEMO
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
You can connect the KR to external devices such as audio
Connecting an External
equipment, MIDI instruments and computer.
❍ Connecting an External Display or Television
You can connect a computer monitor or other external
You can connect a computer monitor or other external
display or a television to the KR, enabling you to display the
Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and
Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and
notations on a larger screen.
notations on a larger screen.
→ You can switch screens with the remote control. For details,
❍ Connecting Video Equipment (p. 187)
see “Using the Remote Control” (p. 84).
With a V-LINK compatible device connected, you can switch
images with the keyboard.
You cannot simultaneously use both an external
❍Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 188)
display and a television with the KR. Moreover,
You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance
neither the external display nor the television will be
data from the KR, or play performance data from the KR on
able to display properly if both are connected at the
the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound
same time.
module, you can perform on the KR and hear the sounds
When using an external display, connect the display to
played through the MIDI sound module.
the Ext Display connector, but do not connect a
Out connector, but do not connect any external display
to the Ext Display connector.
The KR has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you can
also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive
sound.
You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording
equipment and record your performances.
For more information about external display settings, refer to
“Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the
External Display and the Television (External Display)” (p.
186).
❍ Connecting a Computer (p. 195)
You can use a sequencer program to record performance
data from the KR and play performance data from the
program on the KR.
■ Connecting an External
❍Connecting an Expression Pedal
Display
You can connect an expression pedal to the KR.
Displays That Can Be Connected to This
Instrument
Connect the Expression pedal to the Expression Pedal
In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan
monitors that are available on the market are compatible
with this instrument. However, before you connect any
monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:
jack on the jack panel of the KR.
925
*
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you
risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
Resolution
640 x 480 pixels
31.5 kHz
Horizontal scan frequency
Vertical scan frequency
Connector
60 Hz
3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type
Analog
Signal
*
Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the
frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not
compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect
image output when images move, and in certain cases may
even damage the display.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
Making the Connections
Making the Connections
921
Always be sure to use the following procedure when
connecting a television.
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
* You cannot display information or images with a
television when an external display is connected to
the Ext Display connector. To use an television, first
disconnect the external display from the Ext Display
connector, then connect the Video Out jack.
D-sub 15 pin
(Mini)
D-sub 15 pin
(Mini)
Display Cable
(Sold separately)
KR’s Jack Panel
Ext Display Connector
External Display
connected.
1. Turn off the power to the KR and the display to be
2. Use a video cable (sold separately) to connect the KR’s
connected.
Video Out jack with the television’s video input jack.
2. Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the
3. Turn on the power to the KR.
display to the Ext Display connector on the KR.
4. This sets the display format (device, p. 187).
5. Turn on the power to the television.
* You cannot display information or images with an
external display when a television is connected to
the Video Out jack. To use an external display, first
disconnect the television from the Video Out jack,
then connect the external display connector.
■ Changing the Settings for Showing
Images with the External Display
and the Television
(External Display)
This selects the content shown on the external display or the
3. Switch on the KR.
4. This sets the display format (device, p. 187).
5. Switch on the connected display.
television connected to the KR.
→ For more on handling the external display, refer to your
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
display’s owner’s manual.
Turning the Power Off
3. Touch <External Display>.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
A screen like the following appears.
fig.d-extdisp.eps_50
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR.
2. Turn off the KR.
3. Turn off the connected display.
■ Connecting a Television
Video Cable
(Sold separately)
KR’s Jack Panel
Video Out jack
Television
4. Touch the parameter
to make the settings.
5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Function screen.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
■ Explanation of Each Items
Connecting Video Equipment
(V-LINK)
Connecting the KR to a V-LINK compatible image device
allows you to control the images with the KR.
Mode
You can have different images displayed on the television or
external display than those appearing on the KR's own
display.
V-LINK (
) is functionality promoted by Roland
Settings
Explanation
Value
that allows linked performance of music and visual material.
By using V-LINK-compatible video equipment, visual effects
can be easily liked to, and made part of the expressive
The display of notations, lyrics, notation
elements of a performance.
921
Auto
and keyboard, and lyric are switched
automatically.
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Screens are shown the same way they
appear in the KR’s display.
Panel
The Notation screen is normally
displayed.
Connection Examples:
Notation
fig.02-
V-LINK compatible image device
Notation and
Keyboard
The notation and keyboard are displayed.
The Lyrics screen is normally displayed.
However, lyrics are displayed only when
playing back music files that contains
lyrics data.
USB MIDI Interface
Lyric
Slide Show
The image is displayed in the slide show.
KR’s Jack Panel (Front)
MIDI OUT
Expression
Pedal
Notes When Switching the Display on External
Displays and Televisions
• Lyrics are not displayed with audio CDs.
• You cannot display any lyrics screen when playing back
music data that does not include lyrics data.
• The internal songs include a number of jazz pieces that
are played in an improvised fashion, and you may find
notes not conforming to measure lines, odd divisions of
the parts played in the left and right hand, and other
such features that do not match what is shown in the
notation.
■ Using the V-LINK function
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <V-LINK>.
4. Touch <ON>.
Switches to Image Control mode.
You can control images using the twelve keys at the left
end of the keyboard.
When V-LINK is on, “V-LINK” is indicated in the Basic
screen and other screens.
• Neither the external display nor the television will be
able to display properly if both are connected at the
same time.
fig.V-LINKkey
Lyric Color
Selects the color used for lyric in the display.
Value: White, Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Cyan,
A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1
A0 – G1#
Magenta
Device
While V-LINK is switched on, no sound is produced
when you press any of the twelve keys at the left end of
the keyboard.
If you find that the image quality of the television is poor,
try switching the television format.
Value: VGA, PAL, NTSC
5. Touch <OFF> to cancel the V-LINK function.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
■ Making the Connections
Connecting MIDI Devices
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging
performance data, you can control one device from the other.
For instance, you can output sound from the other
instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.
921
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
What’s MIDI?
the device you’re about to connect.
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was
developed as a universal standard for the exchange of
performance data between electronic instruments and
computers.
2. Switch off the power to the KR and the device you’re
about to connect.
3. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI
connectors to each other.
The KR is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange
performance data with external devices. These connectors
can be used to connect the KR to an external device for even
greater versatility.
Please refer to the connection examples below.
4. Switch on the power to the KR and the connected
device.
■ Connectors
5. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
fig.09-
device.
6. You should also set the MIDI settings as needed.
For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to
p. 189–p. 191.
MIDI Out Connector
Connection Examples:
Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
Setup with a MIDI Sequencer
fig.09-10
Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a
pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI
connector.
Roland MT Series
Out
MIDI
In
MIDI In Connector
Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
KR’s Jack Panel (Front)
This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external
MIDI devices. The KR receiving MIDI messages can output
sounds, exchange tones and perform other operations.
Expression
Pedal
*
External MIDI devices can’t be used for remotely changing the
Tones played by the KR’s keyboard.
*
When the KR is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to Local
OFF. Refer to “Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator
and Keyboard (Local Control)” (p. 190).
Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module
fig.09-
Sound Module
MIDI
OUT
THRU
IN
KR’s Jack Panel (Front)
Expression
Pedal
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
Performing in Ensemble with
MIDI Instruments
(MIDI Ensemble)
MIDI Settings
You can make MIDI settings like those described below.
<MIDI Setting>
fig.09-04.eps
You can connect an electronic percussion device or other
MIDI instrument to the KR’s MIDI In connector for ensemble
playing. Making the MIDI settings for the instrument
connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The sounds from
the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KR’s
speaker.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <MIDI Ensemble>.
Display
Explanation
A screen like the following appears.
fig.09-04.eps
Chooses the MIDI send channel
(p. 190).
Tx Channel
Switches Local Control on or off
(p. 190).
Local Control
<Program Change>
fig.09-04.eps
4. Select the method for using the MIDI In connector.
Displayed
Meaning
Normal setting.
Normal
Make changes in Tone and other settings
from the connected device.
Select this when you have percussion pads
connected to the KR’s MIDI In connector.
You do not need to make any MIDI settings
on the KR. Select pad Tones and make other
settings from the connected pads (for further
details, refer to the Owner’s Manual
provided with the pads).
Display
Explanation
Pad
Sends Bank Select MSB messages
(p. 191).
Bank Select MSB
Sends Bank Select LSB messages
(p. 191).
Bank Select LSB
Program Change
Select this when you have a keyboard
connected to the KR’s MIDI In connector.
You can select tones for the connected
keyboard from the KR. No MIDI settings
need be made on the KR.
Sends Program Change messages
(Program Numbers) (p. 191).
Keyboard
5. When “Keyboard” is selected in Step 4 above, use
to select the Tone.
The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
Local On: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
Making the Settings
connected.
fig.09-
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
Sound is emitted
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.
Sound Generator
4. Touch
to make the setting for each
Local On
item.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
Local Off: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
■ Selecting the Transmit Channel
separated. No sound will be produced by the
(Tx Channel)
keyboard when it is played.
MIDI organizes things into “channels,” which are numbered
from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough
for communication to take place. The connected devices must
be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound
will be produced, and no sounds can be selected.
fig.09-
No sound produced
Sound Generator
Select the transmit channel (1–16) of the KR.
Local Off
The channel setting is at “1” when the KR is powered up.
If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections,
messages from the left-hand section are fixed at “3.”
→ When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you don’t
need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off
messages when their power is switched on. First turn on the
power to the KR, then after a few moments, play a note on the
KR; when you turn on the power to the MT Series device,
Local Off is automatically enabled for the KR.
The KR receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16.
■ Disconnecting the Internal
Sound Generator and
Keyboard (Local Control)
When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to
“OFF.” The setting is at “Local Control ON” when the KR is
powered up.
As illustrated, information describing what has been played
on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two
different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping
or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,
route (1) must be disabled, by setting the unit to what is
known as “Local Off.”
fig.09-
Local On
(1)
Sequencer
Memory
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Sound
Generator
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Soft Tru On
(2)
Each note played is sounded twice
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
■ Sending Tone Change Messages
(Program Change/Bank Select
MSB/Bank Select LSB)
A Program Change is a message that means “change to the
Tone of the specified number.” The device that receives this
changes to the Tone of the corresponding number.
Sending Recorded
Performance Data to a MIDI
Device (Composer MIDI Out)
When Composer Out is active, you can send performance
data recorded with the KR to a connected MIDI device or
computer.
When you choose a Program Change message (Program
Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the
MIDI device connected to the KR. The MIDI device that
receives the Program Number changes the tone to the
corresponding Program Number.
When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data is not
sent).
1. Press the [Menu] button.
2. Touch <Composer MIDI Out>.
Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.
Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.
With such devices, the Tone is selected through a
combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select
messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the
MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0–127) and the LSB
(Controller 32, with a value of 0–127).
fig.09-04.eps
*
Some MIDI instruments can’t handle Bank Select messages.
Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB
part.
3. Touch
to set ON or OFF.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to The “Composer
Menu” screen.
Connecting to Audio Equipment
You can connect audio devices to play the sound of the KR
through the speakers of your audio system, or to record your
performance on a recording device.
■ Connectors
fig.09-
KR’s Jack Panel
Front
Rear
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
Output Jacks (Main Output/Aux Output)
You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold
separately) and play the sounds from the KR through the
speakers on the connected equipment, or record your
performances on a recording device.
2. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected
equipment.
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
4. Switch on the KR.
5. Switch on the connected device.
Input Jacks (Input/ Aux Input)
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
You can connect another sound generator, such as audio
equipment or an electronic instrument, using audio cables
(sold separately). Play the sounds from the connected device
through the speakers on the KR.
device.
→ You can adjust the volume of a connected sound module with
the KR.
If the output of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
Recording KR Performances on a Recording Device
7. Start recording with the connected device.
*
You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected
sound generating device.
8. Play the keyboard.
About the Output jack
9. When the performance ends, stop recording on the
922
connected equipment.
This instrument is equipped with balanced (XLR) type jacks.
Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below. Make
connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other
equipment you intend to connect.
Turning off the power
1. Set the volume of the KR and of the connected devices
to the minimum position.
2. Turn off the connected equipment.
3. Turn off the power to the KR.
Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the
Speakers on the KR
■ Making the Connections
921
KR’s Jack Panel (Rear)
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Playing Sounds from the KR Through the
Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording
Your Performances on a Recording Device
fig.09-
KR’s Jack Panel (Rear)
Output R/L
(Line Out, Aux Out)
KR’s Jack Panel (Rear)
Input R/L
(Line In, Aux In)
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
Output R/L
(Line Out, Aux Out)
the device you’re about to connect.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
Indication
Off
Description
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
The Aux Input jacks cannot be used.
the device you’re about to connect.
Select this setting when connecting an
MD player or similar device.
Stereo
2. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected
equipment.
Select this setting when inputting MIDI
encoded signals.
The type of encoded signal is
determined automatically.
A/V Sync
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
A/V Sync
Type A
Select this setting when inputting MIDI
encoded signals.
If the “A/V Sync” setting is not correct,
set this to Type A or Type B.
4. Turn on the connected equipment.
5. Turn on the KR.
A/V Sync
Type B
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
This is set to “Off” at the factory.
device.
→ When “A/V Sync” is selected, the KR automatically
distinguishes the type of the encoded signal, then starts
playing. In some cases, however, it doesn't play correctly.
In such cases, press <Reset>. If playback still doesn’t occur
correctly, set “Mode” to either “A/V Sync Type A” or “A/V
Sync Type B.”
*
You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected
sound generating device.
Turning off the power
1. Set the volume of the KR and of the connected devices
to the minimum position.
*
If both the A/V Sync output and AUX input are connected
simultaneously, please set “Mode” of the Aux input to “Off.”
If this is set to anything other than “Off,” make sure to
disconnect any cables connected to Aux Out or Balanced Out.
If such connections are left intact, you may likely encounter a
loud, continuous beep tone.
2. Turn off the power to the KR.
3. Turn off the connected equipment.
Making the Aux Input Jack Settings
Use this procedure to set the Aux Input jack assignments
when using these jacks.
4. Touch the <Sync> or the <Level>
to change
1. Press the [Menu] button.
the setting.
The “Composer Menu” or the “A/V Sync” screen
appears.
Indication
Sync
Setting
Description
Adjust this value if the
keyboard performance is not
synchronized properly with
other audio data with the type
set to “A/V sync.”
2. Touch <
> <
> to switch the page, then touch
0–100
<AUX Input>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.09-04.eps
This adjusts the level for the
device connected to the Aux
Input jacks.
Level
0–128
→ If the level is set to “0,” only keyboard performance sound
from the device connected to the Aux Input jacks will be heard.
5. Press the [Exit] button.
3. Touch the <Mode>
to change the type of
the AUX Input.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
■ Setup Examples With Surround
Set to “Surround” or
“Ensemble”
Connecting External Speakers
You can connect external speakers and have what is played
on the keyboard be output through the KR’s speakers while
the accompaniment is played through the connected external
speakers.
The piano sound is played through the KR’s speaker, and the
surround sound is played through the external speaker.
Spacious Location
■ Changing the Aux Output
Jacks Settings
Piano Sound
1. Press the [Surround/Reverb] button.
Speaker
Speaker
2. Touch the <Surround>.
fig.09-04.eps
Mixer
3. Touch the Type icon to select the type.
Indication
Description
Select this when playing the keyboard
performance through the KR’s internal
speaker and the accompaniment sound
through an amp or speaker connected to
the Aux Output jacks.
Speaker
Speaker
Ensemble
Location Limited in Space
The sounds played with the keyboard
and the accompaniment sounds are
played through the KR’s speakers, and
the accompaniment sound with reverb
applied is played through the speakers
connected to the Aux Output jacks.
Playing the accompaniment sound with
reverb from external speakers the effect
of being enveloped by the performance
(Surround effect).
Piano Sound
Surround
When any icon is not chosen, No sound is heard through an
amp or speaker connected to the Aux Output jacks.
4. Press the [Exit] button.
Speaker
Speaker
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
■ Connect to the USB Connector
Connecting a Computer
You can connect you computer with a USB cable to the USB
connector, located on the left underside of the KR, and
exchange MIDI data between the instrument and the
computer. You can use the KR to play SMF data created with
the computer and exchange performance data in the same
manner as with MIDI devices connected to the MIDI
connectors.
■ Connect to the MIDI Connectors
You can use a USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately) to
connect the KR to your computer.
If the KR is connected to a computer in which sequencer
software such as Roland’s “Visual MT” is installed, a song
you’ve recorded on the KR can be saved on your computer.
Connecting your computer to the KR for the first time requires
installation of the “USB Driver” (on the included CD-ROM) to the
computer.
Connection Examples
921
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on
your system and on the other programs you are using. Be sure to
read the Readme file on the CD-ROM before installation.
*
In order to make connections to your computer, you must
install “MIDI driver” software on your computer. For details,
refer to the owner’s manual for your MIDI interface.
Windows XP/2000
→ \W2kXP\Readme_E.htm
Windows Me/98/98SE
→ \W98Me\Readme_E.htm
Mac OS X
Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB
connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of
the KR.
→ \Driver (Mac OS X)\Readme_e.htm
fig.comp.e
KR’s Jack Panel (Front)
*
*
Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.
Expression
Pedal
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices,
always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices
before making any connections.
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
*
*
USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need
to purchase.
USB Connector
of your Computer
Turn on the power to the KR before starting up MIDI applications on
the computer. Do not turn the KR on or off while any MIDI
application is running.
USB MIDI Interface
Computer
*
*
If not using USB, disconnect the USB cable from the KR.
If during the transmission/reception of data, the computer switches to
energy-saving mode or suspended mode, or if the KR’s power is
switched on or off, the computer may freeze, or the KR’s operation may
become unstable.
*
Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power
during the transmission/reception of data.
For more on system requirements, refer to the “USB
Installation Guide.” However, note that the KR is not
compatible with Mac OS 9.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices
Connection examples
fig.comp.e
KR’s Jack Panel (Front)
Expression
Pedal
USB connector
USB Connector
of your Computer
Computer
1. Turn off the power to the KR and the computer.
2. Start up the computer.
3. Connect the KR and the computer with a USB cable.
4. Turn on the power to the KR.
→ Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your computer
■ Making the Settings for the
USB Driver
This sets the USB driver used when you have a computer
connected to the USB connector.
In the factory settings, “Original” is selected. Normally, there
is no need to change the USB driver settings.
1. Open the Basic screen or press the One Touch [Piano]
button.
2. Touch the [Option] button.
3. Touch <USB Driver>.
4. Touch
to select the driver type.
Indication
Description
Select this when using a generic USB
driver included with the OS with a USB
connection.
Generic
Select this when using the supplied
driver with a USB connection.
Under ordinary circumstances, use this
mode.
Original
This is an auxiliary mode.
It is not normally used.
Original 2
5. After changing the settings, turn the power off, then on
again.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
If you think there’s a problem, read this first.
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
Screen on connected display or television
doesn’t look right
The power doesn’t
come on
Is the power cord connected and plugged
in correctly? (p. 21)
Is the external display properly connected (p.
185)?
The button doesn’t
work
Is the panel locked? (p. 181)
Turn the power off, then back on.
Is the external display’s power turned on?
may not be displayed when the ambient
temperature is below freezing.
Nothing appears
on screen
Are you using a display that is compatible
with the KR?
to This Instrument” (p. 185).
Vertical lines
appear in the
screen/Color is
“washed out” at the
edges of the
screen
These occur due to the nature of a liquid
adjusting the brightness of the screen
(p. 25).
display connected at the same time?
on external display
when external
display is
connected
Follow the instructions in “Selecting
Images To Be Shown on the KR and
External Displays (User Image Display)”
(p. 170) to set the “External Display” image.
Also refer to “Changing the Settings for
Showing Images with the External Display
and the Television (External Display)” (p.
186).
The positioning of the touch screen may
become displaced if some time has passed
since it was last used. Take a look at
“Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch
The touch screen
doesn’t respond
correctly
Make sure the pedal cord extending from
the stand is securely connected to the pedal
connector on the rear of the unit (p. 21).
While narrow horizontal lines may be
visible in the television screen, this is a
particular characteristic of the television set
and does not indicate any problem with the
KR.
Thin horizontal
Depressing a
Has a different function been assigned to
the pedal?
See “Assigning Functions to Pedals and
Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 167).
lines visible in the
television screen
pedal has no
effect, or the pedal
effect doesn’t stop
Even when all recommended settings are
used, images may still not be displayed
well with the television set you are using
(images may not match the screen size, and
may be clustered towards the center of the
screen).
Poor-quality of
images displayed
in television
Normal pedal operation is automatically
enabled when the One Touch Program
[Piano] button is pressed (p. 22).
Could you be using a connection cable that
contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not
contain a resistor.
926b
The volume level
of the instrument
connected to Input
jacks is too low
No sound is heard
Is the volume level of the KR (p. 22) or
connected device turned all the way down?
Unable to read
from/write to
Are you using (optional) Roland memory?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed
Has a plug remained connected to the
Phones jack?
the keyboard’s speaker stops playing.
external memory
Do you have different external devices
plugged into different power outlets?
When connecting external devices, always
draw power from the same outlet.
Low hum coming
from external
device
Has the Balance knob been moved all the
way to the right or left?
Has the volume been set to “0” using the
Part Balance? (p. 73)
No sound is heard
No data from the remote control is received
when the Remote Sensor is switched off.
Check (p. 172).
Remote Control
not functioning
Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the
minimum level? (p. 44)
Has the footage been adjusted so that all
frequency components aren’t sounded?
(p. 15 in the Quick Start)
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
Is the speaker cable connected and plugged
in correctly?
Have you simultaneously connected
devices for both the output for A/V Sync
and AUX input?
If you use the instrument when two
simultaneous connections have been made,
a loud, continuous beep tone may suddenly
begin sounding.
When V-LINK is switched on, the twelve
keys at the left end of the keyboard are used
to control images, and no sounds are
played with these keys.
No sound is heard
A loud, continuous
beep tone
suddenly begins
sounding
You need to set “Mode” of the Aux input to
“Off.”
Have all devices been switched on?
No sound is heard
(when a MIDI
instrument is
connected)
Please disconnect whatever you have
connected to Aux Out or Balanced Out
Are the MIDI cables connected correctly?
(p. 188)
Does the MIDI channel match the
connected instrument? (p. 190)
changing the Music Style automatically
changes the Tones and tempo of the upper
part of the keyboard to match the new
Music Style. If you want to change only the
Music Style without also altering the tempo
and Tone, check out “Changing Music
Styles Without Changing the Tone or
Tempo (One Touch Setting)” (p. 162).
Has Local Control been set to “Off”?
When Local Control is set to Off, no sound
is produced by playing the keyboard.
Set Local Control to On (p. 190).
No sound is heard
when the keyboard
is played
The Tone has
changed
The maximum number of notes can play
simultaneously is 128. Frequent use of the
damper pedal during automatic
accompaniment or when playing along
with a song on external memory may result
in performance data with too many notes,
causing some notes to drop out.
Not all played
When a performance made along with a
Music Files tune has been recorded,
recording the performance to button [1/
Whole] may make the Tones for buttons [3/
Lower] and [4/Upper] change as well.
notes are sounded
Since the KR’s piano sounds faithfully
reproduce the sense of spaciousness and
reverberation of an actual acoustic piano’s
sound, a certain amount of reverberation is
still perceptible, even with the reverb effect
deactivated.
The sound is strange
Reverberation still
audible even with
Is the KR in layer play? (p. 31)
Sounds are heard
twice (doubled)
when the keyboard
is played
When the KR is connected to an external
sequencer, set it to the Local OFF mode
(p. 190). Alternatively, the sequencer could
be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF.
Have you made the correct Advanced 3D
settings for use with headphones?
Changing the Advanced 3D “Mode” to
“Headphones” or “Auto” and connecting a
pair of headphones configures the settings
for use with headphones.
Sound from the
Output jacks is not
right
Have you set transpose? (p. 102)
The tuning or pitch
of the keyboard or
song is off
Are the settings for the “Temperament”
and “Stretch Tuning” correct? (p. 166)
Is the setting for the “Master Tune” correct?
(p. 170)
On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper
one and a half octaves of the keyboard
continue to sound until they decay
naturally, regardless of the damper pedal.
There is a difference in the timbre as well.
Roland pianos faithfully simulate such
characteristics of the acoustic piano. The
range that is unaffected by the damper
pedal will change depending on the Key
Transpose setting.
If different effects have been selected for
the upper, lower, Layer, and other Tones,
and the effects for the Parts don’t match,
only one of the effects is applied.
In the upper range,
the sound changes
abruptly beyond a
certain key
Effects cannot be
applied to Tones
It’s not possible to apply more than one
effect at the same time, so when a
performance has been recorded on multiple
tracks or when playing along with a song as
it’s played back, the desired effect may not
be applied.
Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been
changed? (p. 162)
Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may
be sounded continuously.
A note doesn’t stop
playing
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
When listening through headphones:
Some of the more flamboyant and
Has Chord Intelligence been set to manual?
(p. 162)
Chord Intelligence
can’t be used
effervescent piano tones feature an ample
high-end component, which may make the
sound appear to have metallic reverberation
added. Since this reverberation becomes
particularly audible when supplemented by
heavy reverb, you may be able to diminish
the problem by reducing the amount of
reverb applied to the sound.
Is the setting for “Piano Style Arranger”
active? (p. 72)
In certain cases, such as when playing
accompaniment may lag when excessive
amounts of performance data are used.
Accompaniment
tempo becomes
unstable
A High-pitched
whine is produced
When listening through speakers:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
produced by the KR) would be suspect.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest
Roland Service Center.
Song doesn’t play back correctly
Does the screen indicate message, like “OK
to delete song?” (p. 104)
Song doesn’t play
back
The internal songs cannot be played back
while recorded performance data remains
in the KR’s memory. Try playing back the
song after deleting the performance data.
When listening through speakers:
Playing at loud volumes may cause
instruments near the KR to resonate.
Resonation can also occur with fluorescent
light tubes, glass doors, and other objects.
In particular, this problem occurs more
easily when the bass component is
increased, and when the sound is played at
higher volumes. Use the following
measures to suppress such resonance.
• Place speakers so they are 10–15 cm from
walls and other surfaces.
Is the light for the Track button
extinguished? (p. 97)
If the button light is out, the music on that
track is not heard. Press the track button so
the light is illuminated.
Only the sound of a
particular
The bass range
sounds odd, or
there is a vibrating
resonance
instrument in a
song does not play
Have song settings been changed for each
Part on the 16-Track sequencer screen (p.
137)?
• Reduce the volume.
• Move the speakers away from any
resonating objects.
Some music files may contain settings that
stop play at a point partway through the
Pressing the [
(Reset)] button
doesn’t return to
the beginning of
the song
When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
produced by the KR) would be suspect.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest
Roland Service Center.
song. Press the [
(Reset)] button several
times more to return to the beginning of the
tune.
Has a Marker placed in the song? (p. 98)
The fast-forward and reverse buttons are
ignored while music files is being read in.
Wait until processing finishes.
The automatic accompaniment doesn’t play
correctly
The [
and [
(Fwd)]
(Bwd)]
If you attempt to play back performance
data that contains more data than the entire
capacity of the KR’s memory, you may find
that operations other than playback (such
as rewind or fast forward) become
unavailable.
Press the [Exit] button several times to
return to the Basic screen (p. 25), and then
select a tone or Music Style.
Can’t select a tone
buttons don’t work
or Music Style
Has the Balance knob been moved all the
There are two types of SMF music files:
format 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF
format 1 data, there will be a slight delay
until playback starts. Refer to the booklet
that came with the music files you’re using
to determine the format type.
There is a slight
delay before
Have you pressed the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button?
If the One Touch Program [Arranger]
button has not been pressed, only the
rhythm pattern is played (p. 64).
Automatic
playback of a song
on external
accompaniment is
not heard
memory starts
Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed?
(p. 136)
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
Is <Mode> in the “External Display
Setting” set to “Slide Show?”(p. 186)
If the connected external memory contains
data to be used in a slide show, the slide
show will begin automatically.
Can’t record
KR operation is
sluggish when
external memory is
connected
Has one of the track buttons for recording
been selected? (p. 110)
Has the setting for “Punch-in Recording”
(p. 142) or “Tempo Recording” (p. 151)
been made?
Set <Mode> in the “External Display
Setting” to a value other than “Slide Show.”
Select the replace recording method (p.
140).
With some music files, the lyrics cannot be
displayed correctly.
Can’t record
It is not possible to record while the
notation is being generated. Once the unit
has finished generating the notation (i.e.,
when the measure number in the screen is
no longer highlighted), try the operation
once again.
If you press a button while the lyrics are
being shown in the display, the lyrics will
disappear. To recall them, touch
Lyrics are not
indicated properly
in the display
<
> in the Piano or Basic screen, or
press the [
In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes
could extend beyond the edges of the
screen, and not be displayed.
You cannot overdub with audio files and
audio CDs.
If you select an internal song in which the
tempo changes during the song, and then
record, the tempo will change in the same
way for the performances that are recorded
on the other tracks. The tempo of the
metronome will also change in the same
way.
performance data, notes will not be
displayed in the notation. Change the part
that is displayed (p. 89).
Tempo of recorded
song or
The notation screen feature is particularly
unsuitable for the display of difficult,
complex musical works that demand
accurate notation. Refer to “Notes
Notation is not
indicated properly
in the display
metronome is off
If you record additional material without
erasing the previously recorded song, the
song will be recorded at the first-recorded
tempo. Please erase the previously
Regarding the Notation Display” (p. 87).
In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes
could extend beyond the edges of the
screen, and not be displayed.
recorded song before you re-record (p. 111).
Any performance that has been recorded is
deleted when the power to the KR is turned
off or a song is selected. A performance
cannot be restored once it’s been deleted.
Be sure to save it on an external memory or
User Memory before you turn off the
power (p. 116).
of information is being displayed or when a
large amount of data is displayed at one
time. Change the notation display settings as
described below (p. 89).
The recorded
performance has
disappeared
Movement of
notation or
keyboard display
not smooth
- Set “Bouncing Ball” to “Off”
- Set “Color Notation” to “Off”
- Set “Keyboard” to “Off”
- Set “External Display (p. 187)” to “Panel”
Is the <Auto Start> set to “On?”(p. 180)
If no action is taken for a certain period of
time while Auto Start is set to ON, the
demo starts playing automatically.
If there is any performance you have
recorded at that time, a confirmation screen
asking you if you want to delete the song
appears in the display.
If you want to return to the previous screen
and continue with the recorded
performance, touch <Cancel>.
If you touch <OK>, the song is deleted and
the demo song begins.
In certain cases, such as when playing
songs on external memories, the song may
lag when excessive amounts of
A screen asking if I
want to “OK to
Song becomes
unstable
performance data are used.
delete Song?”
suddenly appears.
Unable to play
back internal
songs
Have you pressed the remote control’s
[MUTE] button, muting the sound?
The KR can play back audio files in the
following format.
• “.WAV” extension
• 16bit linear
Unable to play
back audio files
• Sampling rate of “44.1 kHz”
• Stereo
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Indication
Meaning
Error 01:
Error 02:
You can only read the music file. It can not be saved.
An error occurred during writing. The storage media’s protect tab may be in the “Protect” (writing
prohibited) position, or the storage media may not yet be initialized.
No storage media is inserted.
Insert the storage media and try again.
Error 10:
Error 11:
Error 14:
Error 15:
Error 16:
There is not sufficient free memory in the save destination.
Either insert other storage media or delete unneeded files and try again.
An error occurred during writing. The storage media may be corrupted.
The file is unreadable.
The data format is not compatible with the KR.
Data was not called up in time for playback of the song.
After waiting several seconds, you may be able to play back the song by pressing the [
] button again.
The selected image data cannot be displayed.
Prepare image data that can be used with the KR (p. 171).
Error 17:
Error 30:
Error 40:
The internal memory capacity of the KR is full.
The KR cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device.
Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the KR.
A MIDI cable has been disconnected.
Connect it properly and securely.
Error 41:
Error 43:
A MIDI transmission error has occurred.
Check the MIDI cable and connected MIDI device.
There may be a problem with the system.
Error 51:
Repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it is not solved after you have tried several times, contact the
Roland service center.
Error 60:
Error 61:
Error 62:
Error 63:
Moving Key Error.
Stop use immediately, and contact the nearest Roland Service Center.
The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current.
Check the storage media to confirm that no damage has occurred to it.
Error 65:
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
[Piano]
66 EP Legend
67 Harpsichord
68 Coupled Hps.
69 Harpsichord2
70 Comp Clav.
71 Reso Clav.
72 Phase Clav.
73 Pulse Clav
74 Celesta 2
43 Digi Church
44 VS Organ
54 Finger Slap
55 Mr.Smooth
56 Slap Bass 1
57 Slap Bass 2
58 Synth Bass 1
59 Jungle Bass
60 Hammer
45 Metalic Org.
46 CheeseOrgan
47 Accordion Fr
48 AccordionFr2
49 Accordion It
50 Bright Acco.
51 Soft Acco.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Superior Grd
NaturalGrand
Vintage EP
Natural Hps.
Vibraphone
MagicalPiano
EP Belle
61 SynthBass101
62 ResoSH Bass
63 Acid Bass
64 Clavi Bass
65 Synth Bass 2
66 Beef FM Bass
67 Attack Pulse
68 Rubber Bass
69 Sitar
75 Soft Marimba
76 Vibe Tr.
52 Bandoneon
53 Harmonica
Mallet Isle
FM E.Piano 2
77 Marimba Tr.
78 Kalimba
10 ’60sE.Piano1
11 Music Bell 3
12 Superior+Str
13 Superior+Pad
14 Superior+Cho
15 Ariel Piano
16 Phase Clav.2
17 FM E.Piano
18 Morning Lite
19 Jazzy Vib+Gt
20 Honky-tonk
21 Rock Piano
22 Stage EP
[Guitar / Bass]
79 Music Box 2
80 Music Bell
81 Music Bell 2
82 Tubular-bell
83 Church Bell
84 Ballad Bells
85 Bell Monitor
86 Timeline
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EX Nylon Gtr
ClearSteelGt
Jazz Guitar2
Fl.Gtr Roll
70 Sitar 2
71 Banjo
72 Shamisen
73 Koto
Mandolin
JC Chorus Gt
TC Clean ff
Overdrive Gt
DistortionGt
74 Taisho Koto
87 Vibra Bells
[Strings]
[Organ]
10 Amore Story
11 EX A.Guitar2
12 EX Steel Gt2
13 Uncle Martin
14 Flamenco Gtr
15 Jazz Guitar
16 Wild Ac.Bs
17 Wood Bass
18 W.Bass+Ride
19 Fingered Bs.
20 Picked Bass
21 Fretless Bs.
22 Nylon Guitar
23 Requint Gtr
24 EX Ac.Guitar
25 EX Steel Gt.
26 Steel-str.Gt
27 12-str.Gt
23 Stage Phazer
24 Vibrations
25 Celesta
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Full Strings
Rich Strings
Studio Sect.
Dolce Qrt
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ChurchOrgan1
Gospel Spin
Rock Organ2
German Acco.
Blues Harp
Full Stops
26 Marimba
27 Xylophone
28 NaturalC.Hps
29 Clav.
Lunar Strngs
R&B SoftPad
Wind & Str
Aerial Harp
Violin
30 Music Box
31 Glockenspiel
32 SuperiorGrd2
33 Natural Gnd2
34 NaturalMello
35 Piano Str2
Perc. Organ2
Surf’s Up!
R&B Organ
10 Cello
10 Rocker Spin
11 Combo Jz.Org
12 Ballad Organ
13 L-Organ
11 Octave Pizz.
12 Silky Way
13 Strings Pad
14 2-way Sect.
15 DolceStrings
16 Velo Strings
17 Harp Strings
18 Mellow Str
19 EX Orchestra
20 Slow Violin
21 PizzicatoStr
22 Strings
36 Grand Piano1
37 Grand Piano2
38 MellowPiano1
39 PianoStrings
40 Bright Piano
41 DetunedPiano
42 Honky-tonk 2
43 MellowPiano2
44 Piano Oohs
45 PianoKidsCho
46 Air Grand
14 Jazz Organ1
15 Masked Opera
16 Grand Pipe
17 Theater Org.
18 La Seine
28 Steel + Body
29 Nylon+Steel
30 EX A.Guitar3
31 Steel Vox
19 ParisRomance
20 Mellow Bars
21 Organ 1
32 Ukulele
22 Organ 2
33 Hawaiian Gt
34 Clean Gt.
23 Oct Strings
24 Strings 2
23 Lower Organ1
24 Trem. Organ
25 ’70s E.Organ
26 ’60s Organ
27 Jazz Organ2
28 Jazz Organ3
29 Jazz Organ4
30 Chorus Organ
31 Perc. Organ
32 Rock Organ1
33 Rotary Organ
34 Rotary Org.S
35 Rotary Org.F
36 ChurchOrgan2
37 Pipe Organ
38 Trem.Flute
39 Organ Flute
40 Nason flt 8’
41 Organ Bass
42 Pipe Org. Bs
47 Ballad Piano
48 UprightPiano
49 Mono Piano
50 FM+SA EP
51 MIDI Piano1
52 EG+E.Piano 1
53 EG+E.Piano 2
54 Bell Piano
35 JC Clean Gt.
36 Mid Tone GTR
37 TC Rear Pick
38 Acid Guitar
39 Open Hard
40 Feedback Gt.
41 Power Guitar
42 Guitar Pinch
43 Mystic Gtr
44 Funk Gt.
25 DecayStrings
26 Bright Str
27 Slow Strings
28 SlowStrings2
29 Legato Str
30 Warm Strings
31 Sahara Str
32 Decay Str2
33 Decay Str3
34 Tremolo Str
35 Orchestra
36 Orchestra 2
37 Farewell
55 E. Grand
56 Mild E.Grand
57 Soft E.Piano
58 Phase EP
45 Funk Gt.2
46 Muted Gt.
59 E.Piano 1
47 Muted Dis.Gt
48 Rock Rhythm
49 Dist Rtm GTR
50 Wah Brush Gt
51 A.Bass+Cymbl
52 Acoustic Bs.
53 Rockabilly
60 Pop E.Piano
61 Tremolo EP
62 ’60sE.Piano2
63 E.Piano 2
38 Choir Str
39 Bell Strings
40 Pearly Harp
41 Harp
64 EP Phase
42 St. Harp
65 St.FM EP
43 Viola
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
44 Contrabass
45 Santur
42 French Horn2
43 OrchestraBrs
44 Brass 1
20 HPF Slicer
21 Side Band X
22 Glasswaves
23 Church Choir
24 Voice Oohs
25 Voice Oohs 2
26 Choir Hahs
27 Decay Choir
28 DcyGregorian
29 Doos Voice
30 Doot Accent
31 Dat Accent
32 Bap Accent
33 Thum Voice
34 Humming
35 SynVox
87 Fat & Perky
88 Delayed Lead
89 Fantasia
46 Yang Qin
47 Yang Qin 2
48 Er Hu
45 Brass 2
90 Fantasia 2
46 BrassSection
47 PowerBrass
48 Pop Orch
91 New Age Pad
92 New Age Pad2
93 Sugar Key
49 Soft Pad
50 Soft Pad 2
51 Syn.Strings1
52 Syn.Strings2
53 Syn.Slow Str
54 OB Strings
55 JP Saw Str
56 Timpani
49 Contemp’Orch
50 Brass sfz
94 FreezinNight
95 New Year Day
96 Warm Pad
51 Brass Fall
52 Trumpet Fall
53 EX Alto Sax
54 AltoSax + Tp
55 Alto Sax
97 Sine Pad
98 Nu Epic Pad
99 Hollow Pad
100 Decay Pad
101 Decay Pad2
102 DecayDoosPad
103 Polysynth
104 P5 Poly
57 Warm JP Str
58 OrchestraHit
59 Good Old Hit
60 Euro Hit
56 Grow Sax
57 BreathyTenor
58 Tenor Sax
59 Tenor Sax 2
60 Tenor Sax f
61 Tenor Sax B
62 Baritone Sax
63 English Horn
64 Bassoon
36 Analog Voice
37 InfinitePhsr
38 X Super Saws
39 Fat Stacks
61 6th Hit
62 Bass Hit
105 Poly King
106 Octave Stack
107 Hoovercraft
108 DOC Stack
109 Bustranza
110 Space Voice
111 Heaven II
112 Warm SquPad
113 Voyager
63 Philly Hit
64 Philly Hit 2
65 Mix Hit 1
66 Mix Hit 2
40 Frgile Saws
41 SuperSawSlow
42 Electrostars
43 Bending Logo
44 2600 Sine
65 Piccolo
66 Flute 2
[Sax/Brass]
67 Recorder
45 Square Wave
46 Mg Square
47 JP8 Square
48 LM Square
49 Syn.Square
50 CC Solo
68 Bottle Blow
69 Shakuhachi
70 Whistle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BlowAltoVib
Mariachi Tp.
Romantic Tp.
PowerBrass 2
Flute
114 Film Cue
115 HumanKindnes
116 Bowed Glass
117 Metal Pad
118 Orbiting
71 Ocarina
72 Bagpipe
73 Lochscape
74 Andes Mood
75 HimalayaPipe
76 Wide SynBrss
77 DeepSynBrass
78 Jump Brass
79 Saw Brass1
80 Saw Brass2
81 Synth Brass1
82 Synth Brass2
83 DetuneSawBrs
84 Pro Brass
51 Sleeper
ChamberWinds
Wood Symphny
Sax Section
52 Dual Sqr&Saw
53 Jupiter Lead
54 Sinetific
119 Visionary
120 Halo Pad
121 JP8 Sqr Pad
122 Vox Sweep
123 Consolament
124 JP-8 Phase
125 Sweep Pad
126 Sweep Pad 2
127 Ice Rain
Rom&Mar Tp.
55 FM Lead 1
56 FM Lead 2
57 Saw Wave
58 Saw
10 Mar Tp&Shake
11 Flute+Clari.
12 Multi-Winds
13 Brass Sect 2
14 EX Tp&Shake
15 Super Tenor
16 AltoSax Soft
17 Soprano Sax
18 Clarinet
59 Doctor Solo
60 Mg Lead
61 P5 Saw Lead
62 JP SuperSaw
63 Rhythmic Saw
64 Natural Lead
65 SequencedSaw
66 Waspy Synth
67 Velo SawLead
68 Attack Lead
69 DelyResoSaws
70 Wezcoast
128 Clavi Pad
129 Toy Box
85 SynBrass sfz
130 Soundtrack
131 Crystal
19 Oboe
132 Syn Mallet
133 ChristmasBel
134 Clear Bells
135 Himalaya Ice
136 Glittery Pad
137 Atmosphere
138 Harpvox
[Voice]
20 EX Trumpet
21 Flugel Horn
22 Pan Flute
1
Aerial Choir
23 Qu Di
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Jazz Scat
24 SuperF.Horns
25 Angel Pipes
26 Trumpet
Gregorian
Dreaming Box
Glass Pad
71 Syn.Calliope
72 JP8 Pulse
139 Nylon Harp
140 Nylon + EP
141 HollowReleas
142 Tubulence
143 Landing Pad
144 Shangri-La
145 Motion Pad
146 Brightness
147 Org Bells
27 Tp Shake
Rich Choir
Gospel Oohs
Female Aahs
F.Chorus Luh
73 LM PureLead
74 Orgaenia
28 Bright Tp.
29 Warm Tp.
30 Dark Trumpet
31 Romantic Tp2
32 Trombone
33 Trombone 2
34 Twin bones
35 Bones Sect.
36 Bright Tb.
75 Chiffer Lead
76 Cheese Saw
77 JP OctAttack
78 Charang
10 Jazz Doos
11 Kid’s Choir
12 Angels Choir
13 Boys Choir
14 Opera Voice
15 Mellow Choir
16 Holy Voices
17 Morning Star
18 Mystic Str
79 Reso Saw
80 Wire Lead
81 2600 SubOsc
82 Solo Vox
148 Goblin
149 Saturn Siren
150 RandomEnding
151 Echo Drops
152 Echo Bell
37 Tuba
83 RAVE Vox
84 5th Saw Wave
85 Freeze Synth
86 Bass & Lead
38 MutedTrumpet
39 MuteTrumpet2
40 MuteTrumpet3
41 French Horns
19 Trancy X
153 Echo Pan
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
154 Echo Pan 2
155 Big Panner
156 Ai-yai-a
221 Hawaiian Gt
222 Clean Gt.
223 Chorus Gt.
224 Muted Gt.
225 Funk Gt.
288 Flute
355 Rain
289 Recorder
290 Pan Flute
291 Bottle Blow
292 Shakuhachi
293 Whistle
356 Thunder
357 Wind
157 Saturn Rings
158 Star Theme
159 Rising Osc
160 Galaxy Way
161 12th Planet
162 PolySweep Nz
163 En-co-re
358 Stream
359 Bubble
226 Funk Gt.2
227 Overdrive Gt
228 DistortionGt
229 Feedback Gt.
230 Gt.Harmonics
231 Gt. Feedback
232 Acoustic Bs.
233 Fingered Bs.
234 Picked Bs.
235 Fretless Bs.
236 Slap Bass 1
237 Slap Bass 2
238 SynthBass101
239 Synth Bass 1
240 Synth Bass 2
241 Synth Bass 3
242 Synth Bass 4
243 Rubber Bass
244 Violin
360 Bird
294 Ocarina
361 Dog
295 Square Wave
296 Square
362 Horse-Gallop
363 Bird 2
297 Sine Wave
298 Saw Wave
299 Saw
364 Telephone 1
365 Telephone 2
366 DoorCreaking
367 Door
164 Piano 1
165 Piano 1w
166 Piano 1d
300 Doctor Solo
301 Syn.Calliope
302 Chiffer Lead
303 Charang
304 Solo Vox
305 5th Saw Wave
306 Bass & Lead
307 Fantasia
167 Piano 2
368 Scratch
168 Piano 2w
369 Windchime
370 Helicopter
371 Car-Engine
372 Car-Stop
373 Car-Pass
374 Car-Crash
375 Siren
169 Piano 3
170 Piano 3w
171 Honky-tonk
172 Honky-tonk 2
173 E.Piano 1
174 E.Piano 2
175 ’60s E.Piano
176 E.Piano 1v
177 E.Piano 2v
178 Detuned EP 1
179 Detuned EP 2
180 Harpsichord
181 Coupled Hps.
182 Harpsi.w
183 Harpsi.o
308 Warm Pad
309 Polysynth
310 Space Voice
311 Bowed Glass
312 Metal Pad
313 Halo Pad
314 Sweep Pad
315 Ice Rain
376 Train
377 Jetplane
378 Starship
379 Burst Noise
380 Applause
381 Laughing
382 Screaming
383 Punch
245 Slow Violin
246 Viola
247 Cello
248 Contrabass
249 Tremolo Str
250 PizzicatoStr
251 Harp
316 Soundtrack
317 Crystal
384 Heart Beat
385 Footsteps
386 Gun Shot
387 Machine Gun
388 Lasergun
389 Explosion
184 Clav.
318 Syn Mallet
319 Atmosphere
320 Brightness
321 Goblin
185 Celesta
252 Timpani
186 Glockenspiel
187 Music Box
188 Vibraphone
189 Vibe.w
253 Strings
254 Orchestra
255 Slow Strings
256 Syn.Strings1
257 Syn.Strings2
258 Syn.Strings3
259 Choir Aahs
260 Choir
322 Echo Drops
323 Echo Bell
324 Echo Pan
325 Star Theme
326 Sitar
190 Marimba
191 Marimba w
192 Xylophone
193 Tubular-bell
194 Church Bell
195 Carillon
327 Sitar 2
261 Pop Voice
262 SynVox
328 Banjo
329 Shamisen
330 Koto
196 Santur
263 OrchestraHit
264 Trumpet
197 Organ 1
331 Taisho Koto
332 Kalimba
198 Organ 2
265 Trombone
266 Trombone 2
267 Tuba
199 Pop Organ 1
200 Detuned Or.1
201 Detuned Or.2
202 Church Org.1
203 Church Org.2
204 Church Org.3
205 Full Organ
206 Jazz Organ1
207 Rock Organ
208 Reed Organ
209 Accordion Fr
210 Accordion It
211 Harmonica
212 Bandoneon
213 Nylon-str.Gt
214 Nylon Gt.2
215 Nylon Gt.o
216 Ukulele
333 Bagpipe
334 Fiddle
268 MutedTrumpet
269 French Horns
270 French Horn2
271 Brass 1
335 Shanai
336 Tinkle Bell
337 Agogo
338 Steel Drums
339 Woodblock
340 Castanets
341 Taiko
272 Brass 2
273 Synth Brass1
274 Synth Brass2
275 Synth Brass3
276 Synth Brass4
277 AnalogBrass1
278 AnalogBrass2
279 Soprano Sax
280 Alto Sax
342 Concert BD
343 Melo. Tom 1
344 Melo. Tom 2
345 Synth Drum
346 808 Tom
347 Elec Perc.
348 Reverse Cym.
349 Gt.FretNoise
350 Gt.Cut Noise
351 String Slap
352 Breath Noise
353 Fl.Key Click
354 Seashore
281 Tenor Sax
282 Baritone Sax
283 Oboe
217 Steel-str.Gt
218 12-str.Gt
284 English Horn
285 Bassoon
219 Mandolin
220 Jazz Guitar
286 Clarinet
287 Piccolo
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
POP
ROCK
JAZZBRUSH
HIP HOP
VOX DRUM
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
Jungle BD 2
Metronome E.Click
Metronome Pi
Concert SD
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
R&B Snare
Rock Snare m 1
Rock Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Vox Dut
22
Rock Snare m 1
Rock Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Kick 2
Pop Kick 1
Pop Side Stick
Pop Snare s 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare s 2
Pop Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Pop Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Pop Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
Pop Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 2
Finger Snap 2
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap 2
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
25
27
Slap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jungle BD 2
HipHop BD1
TR-808 Rimshot
Power Snare 1A
TR-707 Clap
Power Snare 2A
Low Tom 2
Pop CHH 1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 2
Pop OHH
Rock Kick 2
Rock Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Vox Dom
Vox Tuush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu!
Vox That
Vox Aahhh
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
Vox Bom
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
Vox Thu
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
C2
37
39
Rock Side Stick
Rock Snare s 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Rock Snare s 2
Rock Low Tom f
Rock CHH 1
Rock Low Tom
Rock CHH 2
Rock Mid Tom f
Rock OHH
Rock Mid Tom
Rock High Tom f
Rock Crash Cymbal
Rock High Tom
Rock Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Chinees Cymbal
Vibra-slap
Pop Ride Cymbal 3
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
Jazz Snare Swing 1
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare Swing 2
Jazz Snare 2
Jazz Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Jazz Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Jazz Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Pop Mid Tom
Pop High Tom f
Jazz Mid Tom
Jazz High Tom f
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
C3 48
50
49
51
Pop Crash Cymbal 1
Pop High Tom
Pop Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Pop Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Pop Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Jazz Crash Cymbal 1
Jazz High Tom
Jazz Ride Cymbal 1
Jazz Chinees Cymbal
Jazz Ride Cymbal 2
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Jazz Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Jazz Ride Cymbal 3
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Crash Cymbal 3
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
52
53
54
56
58
Shake Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
55
57
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
59
Vox Afahhhh
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
C4 60
62
61
63
64
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
65
66
68
70
67
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
69
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
HipVibraslap
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
High Hoo
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
Low Hoo
79
Mute Triangle2
Open Triangle 2
Shaker
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
C6 84
86
85
87
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
HipHop SD 2
LoFi SD Rim
TR-808 Clap
Room Snare 1
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
89
90
92
94
91
93
Standard 1 Snare 2A
Room Snare 2
Standard 1 Snare 1
Standard 1 Snare 2B
----
----
----
----
----
95
96
98
C7
97
99
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
100
101
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
102
104
106
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
----
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
103
105
Tape Rewind
Phono Noise
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2A
Elec Snare 4A
Elec Snare 4B
107
108
C8
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
STD CHINA
STANDARD 1
STANDARD 2
STANDARD 3
ROOM
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
----
----
----
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
22
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
25
27
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 1 Kick 1
Standard 1 Kick 2
Side Stick 1
Standard 1 Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Standard 1 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Close Hi-hat1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
----
----
----
Cana
Ban Gu 1
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 1 Kick 1
Standard 1 Kick 2
Side Stick 1
Standard 1 Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Standard 1 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Close Hi-hat1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 2 Kick 2
Standard 2 Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Standard 2 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Standard 2 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 2
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 3 Kick 2
Standard 3 Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Standard 3 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Standard 3 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Room Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Room Snare 2
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Room Mid Tom 1
Room High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
C2
37
39
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
C4 60
62
61
63
64
Taiko 1
Nao Bo
Taiko 2
Xiao Bo 1
Taiko 3
Open High HuYinLuo 2 [EXC8]
Taiko 4
65
66
68
70
[EXC8]
[EXC8]
67
69
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Taiko 5
Open High HuYinLuo 1
Taiko 6
Shou Luo 1
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Claves
High Wood Block
Claves
High Wood Block
Claves
High Wood Block
Claves
High Wood Block
76
Mute Low HuYinLuo 2
Shou Luo 2
Xiao Bo 2
Ban Gu 2
Xiao Bo 3
Open High HuYinLuo 3
Mute High HuYinLuo
Mute Low HuYinLuo 1
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
----
----
----
----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
Bar Chime
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
96
98
C7
97
99
Open Sagat
Close Sagat
Ban Gu 1
Ban Gu 3
----
100
101
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
ELECTRONIC
DANCE
POWER
TR-808/909
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
TR-808 Kick 2
HipHop BD1
Side Stick 2
Power Snare 2
TR-808 Clap
Elec Snare 3
Elec Low Tom 2
CR-78 CHH
Elec Low Tom 1
TR-808 CHH
Elec Mid Tom 2
CR-78 OHH
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
22
25
27
Slap
Slap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Elec Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Power Kick2
Power Kick1
Side Stick 2
Dance Snare1
TR-808 Clap
Power Snare 1
Power Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Power Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Power Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Power Mid Tom 1
Power High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Power High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
TR-909 Kick
TR-808 Kick
TR-808 Rimshot
TR-808 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
TR-909 Snare 1
TR-808 Low Tom 2
TR-808 CHH
TR-808 Low Tom 1
TR-808 CHH
TR-808 Mid Tom 2
TR-808 OHH
TR-808 Mid Tom 1
TR-808 High Tom 2
TR-808 Cymbal
TR-808 High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Elec Kick 1
C2
Side Stick 2
Elec Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Elec Snare 2
Elec Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Elec Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Elec Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Elec Mid Tom 1
Elec High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
37
39
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Elec Mid Tom 1
Elec High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
Tambourine
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
TR-808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
High Hoo
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
TR-808 High Conga
TR-808 Mid Conga
TR-808 Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
TR-808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
C5 72
74
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
Low Hoo
79
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
C6 84
86
Castanets
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
JAZZ
BRUSH
ORCHESTRA
SFX Set
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
25
27
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
Closed Hi-hat 3
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Ride Cymbal 1
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 1
Concert BD
Side Stick 2
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Jazz Snare 1
Hand Clap 3
Standard 2 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Low Tom 2
C2
-----
-----
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull
Sticks
37
39
[EXC7]
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Brush Closed Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Square Click
[EXC1]
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
Guitar cutting noise (up)
Guitar cutting noise (down)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
Door Creaking
Door
Brush Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 1
Brush Open Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Mid Tom 1
Brush High Tom 2
Brush Crash Cymbal
Brush High Tom 1
Brush Ride Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Brush Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Concert Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Concert Cymbal 1
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
Scratch
61
63
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
64
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Bubble
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
-----
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
C6 84
86
Cat
Bird
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
BabyLaughing
Boeeeen
Glass & Glam
Ice Ring
Crack Bottle
Pour Bottle
Car Horn
R.Crossing
SL 1
SL 2
Seal
Fancy Animal
Elephant
Bike
88
-----
-----
89
90
92
94
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
91
93
95
96
98
C7
97
99
100
101
-----
Small Club
-----
-----
-----
102
104
103
105
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects List
Effect Type
Equalizer
Explanation
Effect Type
Rotary
Explanation
This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, high).
This is a stereo spectrum.
The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary
speakers often used with the electric organs of the
past.
Spectrum
Enhancer
Adds sparkle and tightness to the sound.
This type provides modified response for the rota-
ry speaker, with the low end boosted further.
Rotary2
Adds a special effect to the sound by cutting the
volume in varying ranges.
Isolator
It comprises vibrato/chorus, overdrive, and rotary
effects.
Rotary Multi
Stereo Delay1
Stereo Delay2
Stereo Delay3
Stereo Delay4
Stereo Delay5
Boosts the volume of the lower range, creating
powerful lows.
Low Boost
High Pass Filter
Overdrive
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one eighth note.
This is a low-cut filter. It cuts the low-frequency
component.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one quarter-note triplet.
Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by
vacuum tube amplifiers.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one dotted eighth note.
Distortion
Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive.
This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion.
Overdrive2
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one quarter note.
This is a distortion effect that provides heavy dis-
tortion.
Distortion2
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one half note.
Speaker
Simulator
Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to
record the speaker sound.
Monaural Delay This is a monaural delay.
Guitar Amp
Simulator
This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar
amplifier.
Modulation
Delay
Adds modulation to the delayed sound.
A phase-shifted sound is added to the original
sound and modulated.
Triple Tap Delay Produces three delay sounds; center, left and right.
Phaser
3D Delay
This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound.
Multi Stage
Phaser
Extremely high settings of the phase difference
produce a deep phaser effect.
A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape
delay sound.
Tape Echo
A phaser that continues raising/lowering the fre-
quency at which the sound is modulated.
Infinite Phaser
This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and de-
layed sound to the input sound.
Reverse Delay
It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls
like a jet airplane taking off or landing.
Stereo Flanger
3D Flanger
This is an effect that intentionally degrades the
sound quality for creative purposes.
Lo-Fi
This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound.
Telephone
Gate Reverb
This applies a telephone sound.
A flanger that lets you apply an effect independent-
ly to the low-frequency and high-frequency ranges.
2Band Flanger
This is a special type of reverb in which the rever-
berant sound is cut off before its natural length.
Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in
timbre.
Auto Wah
Humanizer
Overdrive ->
Chorus
This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in
series.
Adds a vowel character to the sound, making it
similar to a human voice.
Overdrive ->
Flanger
This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in
series.
This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation
Ring Modulator (AM) to the input signal, producing bell-like
Overdrive ->
Delay
This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in se-
ries.
sounds.
Distortion ->
Chorus
This effect connects an distortion and a chorus in
series.
Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo ef-
fect to the sound.
Tremolo
Distortion ->
Flanger
This effect connects an distortion and a flanger in
series.
Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the
sound.
Auto Pan
Distortion ->
Delay
This effect connects an distortion and a delay in se-
ries.
By applying successive cuts to the sound, this effect
turns a conventional sound into a sound that ap-
pears to be played as a backing phrase.
Slicer
Enhancer ->
Chorus
This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in se-
ries.
Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels,
smoothing out fluctuations in volume.
Compressor
Enhancer ->
Flanger
This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in se-
ries.
Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume
level, preventing distortion from occurring.
Limiter
Enhancer ->
Delay
This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in se-
ries.
Stereo Chorus
This is a stereo chorus.
Chorus -> Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series.
Uses a six-phase chorus (six layers of chorused
sound) to give richness and spatial spread to the
sound.
Hexa Chorus
Flanger -> Delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series.
Chorus ->
Flanger
This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series.
This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo (cyclic
modulation of volume).
Tremolo Chorus
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper
Space D
Produces a transparent chorus effect.
pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympathy
Damper
with the notes you play, creating rich and spacious
Resonance
3D Chorus
This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound.
A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect inde-
resonances. This effect simulates these damper res-
onances.
2 Band Chorus pendently to the low-frequency and high-frequen-
cy ranges.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Style List (KR117)
[Pop/Rock]
4
5
6
7
8
9
ModernBallad
'80s Ballad
AcoustBallad
AcoustEzLstn
UnpluggedPop
UnplugBallad
Adult Pop 1
Adult Pop 2
6/8Unplugged
6/8GuitarPop
Acoustic Pop
Live Pop
[Oldies/Country]
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Big Band 2
Jazz Ballad
LooseBigBand
Smooth Jazz
A Cappella
Scat Swing
Organ Swing
Dixieland
[Trad/World]
1
'80s Rock
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Guitar Lady
EasySlowRock
CountryFox 2
Country Gtr
Easy Country
Detroit Pop
'60s Rock'n
DreamSloRock
CountryRock1
CntryBallad1
Groovin R&B
Oldies 1
Clock Rock'n
CountryPop 1
SwinginCntry
Soul
Rock'n Slow
Oldies 2
CntryBallad2
CountrySwing
Rock'n Fever
Country Beat
Slow Country
CountryRock2
CountryFox 1
Blues
1
2
3
4
OrchMariachi
Orch Polka
Boston Waltz
Euro Pop
2
3
Idol Ballad
Pop
4
'80s Pop 1
5
6
7
8
Funky Disco
AdultContemp
Uptown Rock
80sRetroDsco
UK Rock 21st
16BtBrassRck
Barry Dance
70's Pop
Soft Rock
Cool Pop
DiscoShuffl
Analog Beat
Rock Beat
5
6
7
8
FolkValzer 1
FolkValzer 2
Polka Yanks
Polka Party
Madison
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Hawaiian
Hula
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Musical
Pub Boogie
Vienna Waltz
Kids Shuffle
Movie March
Music Hall
Orch Bolero
Orch Waltz
Holiday 1
Classic
Jing Ju
MarchingBand
March
Slow Waltz
Fast Waltz
Paris
Quiet Waltz
Holiday 2
Holiday 3
2 Beat
Lager Polka
Slow Polka
AustrianPolk
AustrianWalz
Irish
Tejano
Celtic
Musette
Scotland
Japan
Ireland
Paso Doble
China Pop
Jiang Nan
Xi Bei
SchlagerBeat
PartySchlagr
'70sSchlager
Disco Fox
Party Polka
RockSchlager
ShufflSchlgr
SimpleMarch1
SimpleMarch2
Simple Waltz
Kids 4/4
Love Ballad
6/8 Ballad
Love Beat
[Gospel/Latin]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SimplyChaCha
Latin Pop 1
Orch Bossa
AmazinGospel
SimpleCumbia
Medium Gipsy
ModrnBeguine
Fast Gipsy
Rhumba
GospelShuffl
ContPraise 1
ContPraise 2
Gospel
UnplugShuffl
CoolLiveBand
Night Ballad
GuitarShuffl
Euro Ballad
Guitar Trio
Midnight Bld
Pop Ballad
Piano Pop
Love Songs
12/8 Ballad
Scat Ballad
'60s Ballad
Torch Song 1
Torch Song 2
Strings
8BeatBallad1
8BeatBallad2
Fireside
Piano Ballad
Story Ballad
SimpleBallad
ClassicBalad
Symph Ballad
R.8-Beat 1
Hip Beat
EZ Listening
Strumin'Away
'70s Disco 1
SmoothContmp
Simple Rock
'60s Feelin'
16Beat Pop
Light Pop
Bright Pop
Heart Beat
Easy Pop
'80s Pop 2
'80s Pop 3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Samba
ModernChaCha
Salsa
R&B
Slow Dance
Twist
Soft Gospel
Gospel Shout
AcoustRhumba
Acoust Samba
Trad Rhumba
Gospel Pop
GospelBallad
Latin Dance
Cha Cha
Trad Tango
SunshineBosa
Jazz Bossa
Merengue
GuitarRhumba
Mambo
Fast Samba
Fast Bossa
Big Samba
Luv Bossa
Mid Bossa
Latin Pop 2
Reggae
Tango
Beguine
Oye Son
Revival
'60s Beach
Slow Oldies
Early Rock
Go Go Rock
Mersey Beat
CountryPop 2
Cajun
Cute Pop
LovelyShuffl
'70s Disco 2
'70s Dance
Fever Dance
Euro Dance
Hard Tekno
Big House
'90s House
House Pop
Ibiza Dance
Cool Rap
Now Hip Hop
Twostep
HipHop Beat
Hip'n Hop
Easy Hop
MorningShffl
Groovy Pop
Smile Pop
Warm Pop
Sunny Pop
Feel Good
US Groove
Steady Rock
Shuffle Rock
Dyno Rock
Power Rock
Heavy Rock
Thump Rock
Asian Pop
Country
Cntry Dreams
Charleston
Bluegrass
R.8-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 1
R.16-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 3
R.16-Beat 4
R.Afro&Swing
R.5BeatSwing
R.Shuffle
R.Waltz
R.March
R.5-Beat
R.7-Beat
P.Pop 1
P.Classic 1
P.Night
P.Bossa Nova
P.Ragtime
P.Classic 2
P.Ballad 2
P.Swing Pop
P.Rock'nRoll
P.Concerto 1
P.Concerto 2
P.Swing
Deep Country
[Big Band/
Swing]
1
2
3
MidnitSloSwg
BigBand Slow
Big Band
4
5
6
7
BigBand Med
BigBand Fast
PnoBndBoogie
SoftJzBallad
Slow Fox
8
Gospel Piano
Asian Rhumba
9
Medium Swing
Jive
Slow Swing
Quick Step
StringsSwing
Foxtrot
Kids 6/8
Kids
Kids Dance
Cinema 2Beat
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Swing Fox
Fox Band
Gipsy Swing
Fast Swing
JzGuitrSwing
Jazz Waltz
Blue Boogie
BigBandBalad
'30s BigBand
P.Shuffle
P.Boogie
P.'50s Rock
P.Latin
[Ballad/Acoustic]
1
2
3
AmericanRock
GtrUnplugged
Movie Ballad
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Style List (KR115)
[Pop/Rock]
9
UnplugBallad
Adult Pop 1
Adult Pop 2
6/8Unplugged
6/8GuitarPop
Acoustic Pop
Live Pop
Love Ballad
6/8 Ballad
Love Beat
UnplugShuffl
CoolLiveBand
Night Ballad
GuitarShuffl
Euro Ballad
Guitar Trio
Midnight Bld
Pop Ballad
Piano Pop
Love Songs
12/8 Ballad
Scat Ballad
'60s Ballad
Torch Song 1
Torch Song 2
Strings
[Oldies/Country]
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Smooth Jazz
A Cappella
Scat Swing
Organ Swing
Dixieland
Hawaiian
Hula
[Trad/World]
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
1
'80s Rock
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Guitar Lady
EasySlowRock
Detroit Pop
'60s Rock'n
DreamSloRock
CountryRock1
CntryBallad1
Groovin R&B
Oldies 1
1
2
3
OrchMariachi
Orch Polka
Musical
2
3
Idol Ballad
Pop
4
'80s Pop 1
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pub Boogie
Vienna Waltz
Kids Shuffle
Movie March
Music Hall
Orch Bolero
Orch Waltz
Holiday 1
Classic
Jing Ju
MarchingBand
March
Slow Waltz
Fast Waltz
Paris
Quiet Waltz
Holiday 2
Holiday 3
2 Beat
Lager Polka
Slow Polka
AustrianPolk
AustrianWalz
Irish
Tejano
Celtic
Musette
Scotland
Japan
Ireland
Paso Doble
China Pop
Jiang Nan
Xi Bei
SchlagerBeat
PartySchlagr
'70sSchlager
Disco Fox
Party Polka
RockSchlager
ShufflSchlgr
SimpleMarch1
SimpleMarch2
Simple Waltz
Kids 4/4
5
6
7
8
Funky Disco
AdultContemp
Uptown Rock
80sRetroDsco
UK Rock 21st
Barry Dance
Soft Rock
[Gospel/Latin]
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Clock Rock'n
CountryPop 1
SwinginCntry
Soul
Rock'n Slow
Oldies 2
CntryBallad2
CountrySwing
Rock'n Fever
Country Beat
Slow Country
CountryRock2
CountryFox 1
Blues
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SimplyChaCha
Latin Pop 1
Orch Bossa
AmazinGospel
Rhumba
GospelShuffl
ContPraise 1
ContPraise 2
Gospel
EZ Listening
Strumin'Away
'70s Disco 1
SmoothContmp
Simple Rock
'60s Feelin'
16Beat Pop
Light Pop
Bright Pop
Heart Beat
Easy Pop
'80s Pop 2
'80s Pop 3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Samba
ModernChaCha
Salsa
Soft Gospel
Gospel Shout
AcoustRhumba
Acoust Samba
Trad Rhumba
Gospel Pop
GospelBallad
Latin Dance
Cha Cha
Trad Tango
SunshineBosa
Jazz Bossa
Merengue
GuitarRhumba
Mambo
Fast Samba
Fast Bossa
Big Samba
Luv Bossa
Mid Bossa
Latin Pop 2
Reggae
R&B
Slow Dance
Twist
8BeatBallad1
8BeatBallad2
Fireside
Piano Ballad
Story Ballad
SimpleBallad
ClassicBalad
Symph Ballad
R.8-Beat 1
Cute Pop
LovelyShuffl
'70s Disco 2
'70s Dance
Fever Dance
Euro Dance
Hard Tekno
Big House
'90s House
House Pop
Ibiza Dance
Cool Rap
Now Hip Hop
Twostep
HipHop Beat
Hip'n Hop
Easy Hop
MorningShffl
Groovy Pop
Smile Pop
Warm Pop
Sunny Pop
Feel Good
US Groove
Steady Rock
Shuffle Rock
Dyno Rock
Power Rock
Heavy Rock
Thump Rock
Asian Pop
'60s Beach
Slow Oldies
Early Rock
Go Go Rock
Mersey Beat
CountryPop 2
Cajun
R.8-Beat 2
Country
R.16-Beat 1
R.16-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 3
R.16-Beat 4
R.Afro&Swing
R.5BeatSwing
R.Shuffle
R.Waltz
R.March
R.5-Beat
R.7-Beat
Cntry Dreams
Charleston
Bluegrass
Deep Country
[Big Band/
Swing]
Tango
Beguine
Oye Son
Revival
Gospel Piano
Asian Rhumba
1
2
3
MidnitSloSwg
BigBand Slow
Big Band
P.Pop 1
P.Classic 1
P.Night
4
5
6
7
BigBand Med
BigBand Fast
PnoBndBoogie
Medium Swing
Jive
P.Bossa Nova
P.Ragtime
P.Classic 2
P.Ballad 2
P.Swing Pop
P.Rock'nRoll
P.Concerto 1
P.Concerto 2
P.Swing
P.Shuffle
P.Boogie
P.'50s Rock
P.Latin
Kids 6/8
Kids
Kids Dance
Cinema 2Beat
8
9
Slow Swing
Quick Step
StringsSwing
Foxtrot
Swing Fox
Fox Band
Gipsy Swing
Fast Swing
JzGuitrSwing
Jazz Waltz
Blue Boogie
BigBandBalad
'30s BigBand
Big Band 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
[Ballad/Acoustic]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AmericanRock
GtrUnplugged
Movie Ballad
ModernBallad
'80s Ballad
AcoustBallad
AcoustEzLstn
UnpluggedPop
Jazz Ballad
LooseBigBand
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chord List
*
*
● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 59).
C
C#
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
Cmaj7
C7
C#maj7
C#7
Dmaj7
D7
maj7
7
Emaj7
E7
Fmaj7
F7
Cm
C#m
Dm
m
Em
Fm
Cm7
Cdim
C#m7
C#dim
Dm7
Ddim
m7
dim
Em7
Edim
Fm7
Fdim
Cm7 ( 5 )
C#m7 ( 5 )
C#aug
Dm7 ( 5 )
E
E
E
E
E
E
m7 ( 5 )
Em7 ( 5 )
Fm7 ( 5 )
Caug
Daug
aug
Eaug
Faug
Csus4
C7sus4
C6
C#sus4
C#7sus4
C#6
Dsus4
D7sus4
D6
sus4
7sus4
6
Esus4
E7sus4
E6
Fsus4
F7sus4
F6
Cm6
C#m6
Dm6
m6
Em6
Fm6
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chord List
*
*
● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 59).
F#
G
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F#maj7
F#7
Gmaj7
G7
maj7
7
Amaj7
A7
maj7
7
Bmaj7
B7
F#m
Gm
m
Am
m
Bm
F#m7
F#dim
F#m7 ( 5 )
F#aug
F#sus4
Gm7
Gdim
Gm7 ( 5 )
Gaug
Gsus4
m7
Am7
Adim
Am7 ( 5 )
Aaug
Asus4
m7
Bm7
Bdim
Bm7 ( 5 )
Baug
Bsus4
dim
dim
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
F#7sus4
F#6
G7sus4
G6
A
A
7sus4
6
A7sus4
A6
B
B
7sus4
6
B7sus4
B6
F#m6
Gm6
A
m6
Am6
B
m6
Bm6
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Song List
Folks
Kids
Jingle Bells
EZ Classical
27 Sonata (Haydn)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Greensleeves
Entertainer
6
7
8
9
Silent Night, Holy Night
Joy To The World
Puppy’s March
28 Italian Concerto
Annie Laurie
Londonderry Air
Ave Maria
Classical
→
Song files of this genre corresponds to
the included collection of printed music
entitled “Roland 60 Classical Piano
Masterpieces.”
10 Frog Song
11 Little Fox
Amazing Grace
Little Brown Jug
12 Lightly Row
13 The Cuckoo
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Sonate No.15
When The Saints Go Marchin’
In
8
9
Liebestraume 3
Etude, op.10-3
Je te veux
Stagecoach
EZ Classical
10 Hallelujah!
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
La Fille Aux Cheveux De Lin
La Campanell
Valse, op.64-1
Golliwog’sCakewalk
FantaisieImpromptu
Arabesque 1
Jazzy
Eine Kleine Nachtmusik
Les patineurs, Valse
Divertimento
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Grand Symphoney
Trio Grande
Fly Free
Blauen Donau
Impromptu, Op.90-2
Gnossienne 1
Secret Agent
Late Night Chopin
Blue Sky Rag
Preludelight
Sun Daze
10 Auf Flugeln des Gesanges
11 Mazurka No.5
Die Lorelei
12 Gymnopedie 1
Brindisi
13 Etude, op.25-1
10 Air sul G
14 Clair de Lune
11 FantaisieImpromptu
12 Grande Valse Brillante
13 Gymnopedie 1
14 Liebestraume 3
15 Mondschein
Keepers Tale
15 Etude, op.10-5
10 Count On The Blues
11 One Down And Easy
12 A Prelude To ...
16 Dr.GradusAdParnassum
17 Grande Valse Brillante
18 La priere d’une Vierge
19 Course en Troika
20 To The Spring
13 Bach’s A Boppin’
14 Kismet’s Salsa
16 Nocturne No.2
17 Valse, op.64-1
18 Prelude, op.28-15
19 Traumerei
15 From Matthew’s Passion
16 Roll Over Ludwig
21 Valse, op.64-2
22 Radetzky Marsch
23 Traumerei
20 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart)
21 Ungarische Tanze 5
22 O’sole Mio
24 Moments Musicaux 3
25 Prelude, op.28-15
26 Harmonious Blacksmith
27 Ungarische Tanze 5
28 Turkischer Marsch(Beethoven)
29 Nocturne No.2
Kids
1
2
3
4
5
Grandfather’s Clock
Old MacDonald Had A Farm
Twinkle Twinkle, Little Star
Mary Had A Little Lamb
London Bridge
23 La Primavera
24 Trepak
25 Canon (Pachelbel)
26 Ombra maifu
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Song List
Classical
30 Fruhlingslied
Practice
Innocence
Practice
4
5
6
7
8
9
40 Invention 15
31 Praludium
Progress
41 Beyer 15
32 Jagerlied
The Clear Stream
Gracefulness
The Hunt
42 Beyer 21
33 Menuet Antique
34 Fur Elise
43 Beyer 25
44 Beyer 29
35 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart)
36 Standchen
Tender Flower
45 Beyer 34
10 The Young Shepherdess
11 Farewell
46 Beyer 38
37 Humoreske
47 Beyer 42
38 Blumenlied
12 Consolation
13 Austrian Dance
14 Ballad
48 Beyer 46
39 Alpenglockchen
40 Menuett G dur(Beethoven)
41 Venezianisches Gondellied
42 Alpenabendrote
43 Farewell to the Piano
44 Brautchor
49 Beyer 51
50 Beyer 55
15 Sighing
51 Beyer 60
16 The Chatterbox
17 Restlessness
18 Ave Maria
52 Beyer 64
53 Beyer 67
54 Beyer 73
45 Battle of Waterloo
46 Wiener Marsch
47 Le Coucou
19 Tarantella
55 Beyer 78
20 Angelic Harmony
21 Gondola Song
22 The Return
23 The Swallow
24 The Knight Errant
25 Openness
56 Beyer 81
57 Beyer 90
48 Menuett G dur(Bach)
49 Spinnerlied
58 Beyer 93
59 Beyer 98
50 Gavotte
60 Beyer 103
61 Czerny 100- 1
62 Czerny 100-10
63 Czerny 100-20
64 Czerny 100-30
65 Czerny 100-38
66 Czerny 100-43
67 Czerny 100-60
68 Czerny 100-75
69 Czerny 100-86
70 Czerny 100-96
51 Heidenroslein
52 Zigeuner Tanz
26 Invention 1
27 Invention 2
28 Invention 3
29 Invention 4
30 Invention 5
31 Invention 6
32 Invention 7
33 Invention 8
34 Invention 9
35 Invention 10
36 Invention 11
37 Invention 12
38 Invention 13
39 Invention 14
53 La Cinquantaine
54 Csikos Post
55 Dolly’s Dreaming Awakening
56 La Violette
57 Frohlicher Landmann
58 Sonatine op.36-1(Clementi)
59 Sonatine op.20-1(Kuhlau)
60 Sonatine No.5(Beethoven)
981a
*
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use
of this material for purposes other than
private, personal enjoyment is a
violation of applicable laws.
Practice
1
2
3
Arabesque
Pastoral
A Small Gathering
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters Stored to Internal Memory
Parameters Stored in the User Program
Parameters that switch after the User Program name is
touched for a few moments when <Option> on the User
Program screen is set to “Delayed”
→
“Saving Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 130)
Music Style
Tempo
Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro-
gram name is touched when <Option> on the User Pro-
gram screen is set to “Delayed”
Part Balance
Accompaniment Part
Rotary effect (Slow/Fast),
Organ
Accompaniment On/Off,
Chord Recognize Mode,
Leading Bass On/Off, Original/Variation,
Sync Start On/Off,
Footage (Upper, Lower), Percussion
Selected
Tone, Octave Shift,
Arranger
Settings
Right-hand Tone,
Effect (Type, Control 1, Control 2, On/Off,
Layer Tone,
The part to which the effect is added)
Left-hand Tone
Arranger Configuration,
Style Orchestrator, Division
Bass Tone, Chord Tone
Part Balance
Keyboard Parts
Melody
On/Off, Type
Parameters Stored in Memory Backup
Intelligent
Split 1, Split 2, On/Off for the Part,
Layer 1, Layer 2, On/Off for the Part,
Keyboard Transpose, Split Point
→
“Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory
Backup)” (p. 171)
Keyboard Mode
Pedal Settings
Tuning (Tuning, Key, Stretch Tunings)
Master Tune
Functions Assigning to the Left Pedal and
Center Pedal
Bend Range
Effect: the part to which the effect is added
Metronome: Sound
Functions Assigning to the Expression Pedal
Performance Pad
Settings
Count-In: Measures, Sound
Countdown: Sound
User Function
Reverb
On/Off, Type, Depth
Language
On/Off, Echo (Type, Depth),
System
Parameters
Track Assign
Vocal Effects
Transformer Type, Harmonist Type,
Transformer/Harmonist, Music Files Part
Reverb: On/Off, Type, Depth
Advanced 3D:
MIDI Settings for
User Program
Bank Select LSB, Bank Select MSB,
On/Off, On/Off for Each Part,
Various Settings
Program Change, MIDI Transmit Channel
Equalizer
On/Off, Each Sliders Level, Master Level
Remote Control’s Setting
External Display (Device)
Infrared Transmission Function
AUX Input settings
Dynamic Emphasis On/Off, Type
Parameters Stored in the User Program Set
Pedal Shift
Load Next
Parameters That are Stored After the
Power is Turned Off
Touch Screen
Opening Message
Start: On/Off
Auto Demo
BGM: On/Off
USB Driver
Equalizer
User Settings
User Settings
User Settings
Jazz Organ Footage
Piano Designer
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Files That the KR Can Use
What Are Music Files?
■ About the KR Sound Generator
Music Files contain information describing the details of a
musical performance, such as “the C3 key on a keyboard was
pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of force.”
By connecting the external memory to the external memory
port on the KR, the performance information is sent from the
external memory to the piano, and played faithfully by the
piano. This is different than a CD, since the music file does
not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it
possible to erase certain parts, or to change instruments,
tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many
different ways.
The KR come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.
General MIDI
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to
provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs,
and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices.
Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General
MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the
General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI
sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical
performance.
Regarding Copyright
General MIDI 2
Other than for your own personal enjoyment, any use of the
song data programmed in this instrument without the
consent of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.
Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a
secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the
copyright holder.
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up
where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced
expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that
were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations,
such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be
handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available
sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound
generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry
either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
■ The KR allows you to use the
following music files
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does
not include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI
1” as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.
● Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano
Digital HP-G/R and KR Series instrument
● Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files
GS Format
Roland’s original music file is made specifically for practicing the
piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a
complete range of lessons, such as “practicing each hand
separately” or “listening to only the accompaniment.”
The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the
performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including
support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly
compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of
sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many
details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as
reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format
can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features
when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General
MIDI, Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM
Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that
have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product
supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be
used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.
● SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format)
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file
that was formulated so that files containing music file could be
widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the
listening device. An enormous variety of music is available,
whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for
Karaoke, etc.
*
If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the
retailer where you purchased your KR.
XG lite
SMF with Lyrics
XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that
defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the
structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1
specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation
format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone
generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play
back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set
of control parameters and effects.
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that
contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with
Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one
bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation Chart
DIGITAL PIANO
Date : Sep. 1, 2005
Version : 1.00
Model KR117, KR115
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1
1–16
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
x
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
15–113
**************
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
O
O
O
O
Velocity
*1
*1
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
x
x
O
O
Pitch Bend
O
O
0, 32
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
1
O
*1
*1
*1
5
6, 38
7
O
O
O
Volume
10
O
Panpot
*1
*1
11
O
Expression
Hold 1
Control
Change
64
O
65
O
Portamento
Sostenuto
*1
66
O
67
O
Soft
84
O
Portamento control
Effect1 depth
Effect3 depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
*1
91
O (Reverb)
93
O (Chorus)
98, 99
100, 101
O
O
*1
*1
Prog
Change
0–127
**************
O
0–127
: True #
Program number 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
x
x
x
x
x
x
System
Common
System
Real Time
: Clock
: Commands
O
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
O
x
O (120, 126, 127)
: All sound off
O
:
Reset all controllers
Aux
Message
O
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
O (123–125)
O
x
* 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Specifications
KR117M
KR115M
KR115
<Keyboard>
Keyboard
88 keys (Progressive hammer action keyboard with escapement)
100 levels
Touch Sensitivity
Keyboard Mode
Whole, Split (adjustable split point), Layer, Arranger, Piano Style Arranger, Manual Drums / SFX
<Sound Generator>
Conforms to GM2 / GS / XG Lite
Max. Polyphony
128 voices
Tones (Tone Search by terms
and by letters)
6 groups 780 variations (including 8 tone wheel Organs, 17 drum sets, SFX set)
Temperament
Stretched Tuning
Master Tuning
Transpose
8 types, selectable tonic
2 types
415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz (adjustable in increments of 0.1 Hz)
Key Transpose (-6–+5 in units of semitone), Playback Transpose (-24–+24 in units of semitone)
Reverb (12 types, 127 levels), Chours, Rotary and 60 other types, Surround, Advanced 3D,
Dynamic Emphasis (3 types), Equalizer (5 bands, Master level)
Effects
<Arranger>
Music Styles (Style Search
by terms and by letters)
6 groups 310 styles x 3 types (Style
6 groups 285 styles x 3 types (Style Orchestrator)
Orchestrator)
Music Assistant (Search by
terms and by letters)
Over 550 sets x 6 presets, Visual Music Assistant
Programmable Music Styles
Melody Intelligence
Style Converter, Style Composer
24 types
<User Programs>
Internal
36
External Memory
Max. 99 sets
<Metronome>
Tempo
Quarter note = 10–500
Beat
2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8
Volume
10 levels
11 patterns
8 types
Metronome Pattern
Metronome Sound
<Composer>
Tracks
5 tracks / 16 tracks
Note Storage
Resolution
Recording Method
Edit
Approx. 30,000 notes
120 ticks per quarter notes
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In, Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo), Step (Chord Sequencer), Beat Map
Copy, Quantize, Delete, Insert, Erase, Transpose, Part Exchange, Note Edit, PC Edit
Touch the Notes, Replay Pedal, Super Tones, Piano Designer, Visual Lesson, Wonderland/Game, Demo,
Tone Audition, Panel Lock, User Image Display, BMP Export, V-LINK, IR function, Slide Show,
A/V Sync Output/Input
Other Functions
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Specifications
KR117M
KR115M
KR115
<External Storage> USB Flash Memory
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0/1), Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Music Style: MSA, MSD, MSE
Playable Software
Save
Audio File: WAV Format (44.1 kHz 16 bits linear, stereo)
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0), Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Music Style: MSE
<Internal Memory>
Internal Songs (Song Search
by terms and by letters)
Over 190 songs
Max. 200 songs on Favorites, Max. 99 User Styles, Max. 99 User Program Sets,
User Image (Internal x 1, External x 1)
User Memory
<Others>
Rated Power Output
70 W x 4
70 W x 2
20 cm x 2, 16 cm x 2,
8 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2
Speakers
20 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2
Display
Bouncing Beat Indicator, Graphical Color LCD 320 x 240 dot (backlit LCD)
Grand staff / G Clef staff / F Clef staff, with note name /lyrics/ chords / fingering
English / Japanese / German / French / Spanish
Notation
Language
Lyrics
Yes (built-in, external display, MIDI output)
One Touch Program
One Touch Piano, One Touch Arranger
Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition)
Pedals
Soft Pedal (half-pedal recognition, functions assignable)
Sostenuto Pedal (functions assignable)
Vocal Effects
Connectors
Echo, Voice Transformer, Vocal Keyboard, Harmonist
USB memory connector, FDD connector, Output jacks (L/Mono, R), Input jacks (L/Mono, R),
Mic Input jack, Headphones jack (Stereo) x 2, MIDI In connector x 2, MIDI Out connector, USB connector, Ext
Display connector (15-pin D-Sub type), Video Out jack, Expression Pedal jack
Power Supply
AC 115 V, AC 117 V, AC 220 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Power Consumption
360 W
270 W
230 W
1503 (W) x 1579 (D) x 1007 (H) mm
59-3/16(W) x 62-3/16(D) x 39-11/16(H)
inches
1473 (W) x 937 (D) x 930 (H) mm
58(W) x 36-15/16(D) x 36-5/8(H) inches
Dimensions
(including the caster cup)
Lid Open
Lid Open
1473 (W) x 937 (D) x 1446 (H) mm
58(W) x 36-15/16(D) x 56-15/16 inches
1503 (W) x 1579 (D) x 1741 (H) mm
59-3/16(W) x 62-3/16(D) x 68-9/16(H)
inces
Weights
(including the piano stand)
240 kg / 530 lbs
140 kg / 310 lbs
115 kg / 255 lbs
Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces, Remote Control,
CD (Music Data Disc with vocals) (KR117M, KR115M), Dry-cell Batteries, USB Installation Guide,
CD-ROM (Roland Digital Piano USB Driver), Power cord, Anti-theft lock screws, Maintenance Kit,
Key Cover, Caster Cup
Accessories
Options
USB Memory, Floppy Disk Drive
962a
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior
notice.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connected
Numerics
A
External Display ..................................................... 185
Contrast knob ................................................................. 25
Copying
Arranger basic screen ................................................... 69
Arranger Config .......................................................... 162
A song ...................................................................... 119
User Style ................................................................ 159
B
Balance ............................................................................ 73
Beat
Metronome ............................................................... 55
Beat Map ....................................................................... 150
C
Chord Tone ............................................................ 66, 162
Chord Type .................................................................... 59
Chords ....................................................................... 59, 90
Clef L ............................................................................... 91
Clef R ............................................................................... 91
Color Notation ............................................................... 92
Composer MIDI Out ................................................... 191
Computer ..................................................................... 195
Recorded performance .......................................... 111
Error Messages ............................................................ 201
Export .............................................................................. 92
Expression Pedal ......................................................... 185
Ext Display Connector .................................................. 16
Ext Display connector ........................................... 24, 186
External Display ............................................ 24, 185–186
External Memory ......................................................... 113
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Files ...................................................................... 52
F
Factory Setting
Registering ................................................................ 82
Removing .................................................................. 83
Format ........................................................................... 114
[Fwd] button .................................................................. 76
G
General MIDI 2 ............................................................ 217
GS .................................................................................. 217
H
I
Icon .................................................................................. 26
Internal Song List ........................................................ 214
Intro ........................................................................... 57, 65
K
One-Touch Arranger ..................................................... 58
L
Layer ............................................................................... 31
Layer tone ....................................................................... 31
M
Part Exchange (Song Edit) .......................................... 149
PC Edit (Song Edit) ..................................................... 150
Pedal .......................................................................... 22, 91
Pedal Cable ..................................................................... 21
Pedal Connector ............................................................ 16
Pedal connector ............................................................. 21
Pedal jack ...................................................................... 185
Pedal Settings ............................................................... 167
Marker ..................................................................... 98, 164
Erasing ....................................................................... 99
Moving .................................................................... 100
Placing ....................................................................... 98
Repeat ...................................................................... 101
Master Tuning ............................................................. 170
Melody Intelligence ...................................................... 70
[Melody Intelligence] button ....................................... 70
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat ...................................................................... 101
Songs on CDs ........................................................... 77
[Power] switch ............................................................... 21
Program Change ......................................................... 191
PU (Pickup) .................................................................. 112
Q
Quick Tour
R
Repeat ........................................................................... 101
Replace Recording ....................................................... 140
Restoring the Factory Settings ................................... 172
Stretch Tuning .............................................................. 166
Style Composer ............................................................ 153
Style Orchestrator .......................................................... 69
Style Search .................................................................... 62
Surround ......................................................................... 36
Sync Start ........................................................................ 65
S
Screens
Copy Song screen .................................................. 120
Copy Style screen .................................................. 160
Copy User Programs screen ................................. 133
Count settings screen .............................................. 96
Countdown settings screen .................................... 67
Delete Song screen ................................................. 119
Delete Style screen ................................................. 159
Delete User Program screen ................................. 133
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Volume] knob ............................................................... 22
T
Transformer ................................................................... 48
Transpose ..................................................................... 102
U
Loading ................................................................... 132
Registering .............................................................. 130
V
Variation ......................................................................... 57
Vocal Effect ..................................................................... 47
[Vocal Effect] button ..................................................... 47
Vocal Keyboard ............................................................. 51
Volume
Metronome ............................................................... 55
Microphone .............................................................. 23
Overall ....................................................................... 22
Remote Control ........................................................ 86
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland
distributor in your country as shown below.
PHILIPPINES
COSTA RICA
TRINIDAD
NORWAY
JORDAN
AFRICA
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales
AMR Ltd
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
Ground Floor
Kontor Norge
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868) 638 6385
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TEL: 2273 0074
SINGAPORE
SWEE LEE MUSIC
COMPANY PTE. LTD.
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa
1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
POLAND
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
TEL: 243-6399
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-
5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop(PTY)Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
OMAN
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
FAX: (011) 403 1234
EUROPE
TEL:(593-4)2302364
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
TEL: (266) 364 609
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo II,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
THAILAND
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
RUSSIA
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &
Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
Austrian Office
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
VIETNAM
SAIGON MUSIC
DISTRIBUTOR
(TAN DINH MUSIC)
138 Tran Quang Khai Street
Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: 262-0788
SPAIN
ASIA
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
GUATEMALA
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
SWEDEN
TEL:(502) 599-2888
TEL: (08) 848-4068
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
TEL: (014) 575811
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
CZECH REP.
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
MARTINIQUE
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
TEL: (2) 666 10529
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
DENMARK
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
TEL: (020) 8736-0428
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: (011) 223-5384
UKRAINE
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
TEL: 3916 6200
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
UNITED KINGDOM
MEXICO
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
TEL: 2415 0911
TEL: (04) 3360715
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
Parsons Music Ltd.
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
NORTH AMERICA
MIDDLE EAST
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way
Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4
CANADA
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
BARBADOS
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
TEL: (505)277-2557
PANAMA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE
PANAMA
TEL: 17 211 005
HUNGARY
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
TEL: 315-0101
TEL: (23) 511011
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (595) 21 492147
TEL: (022) 66-9426
TEL: (905) 362 9707
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
U. S. A.
KOREA
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
PERU
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
TEL: (021) 285-4169
TEL: (323) 890 3700
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
MALAYSIA
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
TEL: (574)3812529
As of August 1, 2005 (ROLAND)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
KR117M, KR115M & 115
Digital Piano
Roland Corporation U.S.
Address : 5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938
(323) 890-3700
Telephone :
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04017912
’05-11-2N
*
0
4
0
1
7
9
1
2
-
0
2
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
RCA Projection Television HD61LPW165 User Guide
Remington Electric Shaver R 9500 User Guide
Roland DJ Equipment 5100012850 01 User Guide
Roland Printer FJ 40 User Guide
Rosewill Computer Drive RC218 User Guide
Rotel Stereo Amplifier RA 840BX User Guide
RSA Lighting Indoor Furnishings K8V X SE User Guide
Runco Home Theater Screen CX 40HD User Guide
Samsung Blu ray Player BDH5900 User Guide
Sanyo DVD Player DVD X5 User Guide